THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


v  ' 


MUNSON'S    SYSTEM    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


THE 


PHRASE-BOOK 


OF 


PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY, 


CONTAINING    A   LIST    OF   USEFUL   PHRASES,  PRINTED   IN 
PHONOGRAPHIC  OUTLINES  ;  A  COMPLETE  AND  THOR- 
OUGH TREATISE  ON  THE  ART  OF  PHRASEOGRA- 
PHY;  A  TABLE  OF  THE  ABBREVIATIONS  OF 
"PRACTICAL       PHONOGRAPHY"     IN 
OUTLINES ;       EXERCISES      FOB 
PRACTICE  ON  THE  PHRA- 
SES, ETC.,  ETC.,  ETC. 


BY 


JAMES    E.    MUNSON, 

OFFICIAL    STENOGRAPHER,   N.   Y.   SUPERIOB    COURT  ;    LAW    AND  GENERAL 

BEPOBTER  SINCE  1S57;    AUTHOR   OF   THE   "COMPLETE  PHO- 

NOGBAPHER,"  THE  "  DICTIONARY  OF  PRACTICAL 

PHONOGRAPHY,"  ETC. 


NEW  YOEK: 
J.   E.   MUNSON,    PUBLISHEB, 

ASTOK     HOUSE. 
1879. 


Copyright,   1879,   by  JAMES  E.  MXJNSON. 


-I-!- 


PREFACE. 


THIS  text-book  is  the  first  and  only  one  of  its  kind 
that  has  ever  been  given  to  the  public  in  connection 
with  any  system  of  Phonography. 

Other  phrase-books,  or  lists  of  phonographic  phrases, 
it  is  true,  have  been  published,  but  they  have  inva- 
riably been  made  up,  in  whole  or  in  great  part,  of 
phrases  that  the  authors  have  concocted  in  their  own 
minds,  the  selection  oftentimes  being  controlled  more 
by  the  symmetrical  appearance  that  the  signs  have  on 
the  printed  page  than  by  practical  considerations ;  and 
the  number  that  have  originated  in  the  notes  of  actual 
shorthand  -reporting  has  been  exceedingly  small. 

In  this  first  and  very  important  respect,  the  List  given 
in  this  book  differs  radically  from  all  others.  These 
phrases  have  been  selected  with  great  care  from  the 
phonographic  notes  taken  by  the  author,  while  pursu- 
ing his  prcfession  of  verbatim  reporting,  and  covering 
a  period  of  about  twelve  years.  To  these  have  been 
added  a  goodly  number  of  valuable  contributions  by 
other  practitioners  of  the  system. 

Had  the  entire  collection  of  phrases  thus  obtained 
been  printed,  it  would  have  swelled  this  book  to  more 


44846S 


iv.  PREFACE. 

than  double  its  present  size.  But  by  a  critical  and  pains- 
taking process  of  elimination,  omitting  the  less  valuable 
phrases,  and  retaining  only  those  of  known  practical 
usefulness,  the  number  has  been  reduced  to  its  present 
limits. 

To  the  casual  reader,  this  List  of  phrases  may  look 
like  every  other;  but  to  the  student,  who  takes  it  up 
for  the  purpose  of  making  it  his  own,  it  will  not  be  long 
in  disclosing  its  marked  superiority. 

And  yet,  notwithstanding  the  comparative  excellence 
of  the  List,  the  most  valuable  feature  of  the  book  will, 
no  doubt,  be  found  in  the  chapter  entitled  "  Phraseog- 
raphy."  It  is  sometimes  remarked,  and  in  a  general 
sense  it  is  the  fact,  that  every  phonographer  may  do  his 
own  phrasing.  Still,  when  the  principles  of  Phraseog- 
raphy  are  applied  indiscriminately  in  the  writing  of  un- 
vocalized  phonography,  ambiguities,  or  collisions  in  the 
meaning  of  signs,  will  now  and  then  occur,  and  no  one 
can  be  an  invariably  correct  stenographer  who  does  not 
know  where  these  points  of  danger  lie,  and  by  what 
expedients  they  may  be  avoided.  But,  unfortunately, 
they  are  seldom  detected  except  through  the  reporter's 
experience ;  and  they  are  by  no  means  identical  in 
character,  or  to  be  found  in  the  same  place,  in  any  two 
systems  of  shorthand.  In  this  book,  however,  the 
learner  or  writer  of  Practical  Phonography  will  find 
clear  and  explicit  rules  and  directions  on  all  these 
points,  which,  if  properly  observed  and  followed,  will 
obviate  the  necessity  of  learning  in  that  severe  school 
where  all  have  heretofore  been  compelled  to  acquire 
their  knowledge  of  the  stenographer's  art.  In  other 
words,  the  many  things  that  the  author  has  learned 
only  by  long  experience  and  through  many  years  of 


PREFACE.  v. 

practice,  are  represented,  explained  and  illustrated  in 
these  pages,  for  the  benefit  of  others. 

It  must  not  be  supposed  that  the  phrases  of  the  List 
are  of  arbitrary  construction,  and  that  their  acquisition 
will  call  for  a  severe  taxing  of  the  memory,  for  such,  as 
any  phonographer  knows,  is  not  the  case.  They  are 
the  natural  fruits  of  the  system  as  properly  and  intel- 
ligently developed,  and  are  simply  choice  illustrations 
of  the  best  way  of  applying  those  principles  with  which 
every  writer  of  the  system  is  already  familiar. 

As  has  just  been  stated,  this  is  the  only  work  of 
its  kind  in  existence.  The  reason  why  this  is  so  is  two- 
fold. In  the  first  place,  no  one  of  the  authors  of  other 
systems  of  phonography  has  had  the  necessary  expe- 
rience in  practical  reporting  to  qualify  him  to  teach  the 
shorthand  writer  in  the  more  advanced  and  difficult 
department  of  his  studies.  And,  secondly,  with  the 
old  systems — containing  as  they  do  so  many  exceptions 
to  general  rules,  and  employing  for  several  of  the  most 
frequent  words  of  the  language  abbreviations  consisting 
of  tick  or  vowel  signs,  that  will  not  admit  of  being  ex- 
tensively used  in  phrase -writing,  instead  of  simple  con- 
sonant-stems, to  which  all  of  the  various  means  of 
phrasing  may  be  freely  applied — even  under  the  most 
favorable  circumstances,  such  a  work  as  this  could  only 
be  partially  realized.  Indeed,  the  extraordinary  capac- 
ity of  the  author's  system  of  Practical  Phonography  for 
almost  unlimited  natural  phrase-making,  is  to  be  found 
in  no  other  mode  of  shorthand. 

Although  this  book,  as  regards  the  number  of  pages 
it  contains,  is  not  a  large  one,  yet  it  represents  a  vast 
amount  of  work.  For  many  years  past,  both  at  the 
time  of  taking  notes,  and  while  afterward  transcribing 


vi.  PREFACE. 

them,  or  comparing  the  transcripts  with  them,  the  au- 
thor has  constantly  had  his  attention  directed  to  the 
subject  of  practical  phrase-writing ;  and  during  the  last 
two  years,  the  brief  signs  for  if,  y  and  hf  and  the  best 
way  of  using  them,  have  received  special  consideration. 

The  fact,  too,  that  there  was  to  be  had  no  work 
similar  in  kind  to  this,  from  which  a  hint,  to  assist  in  the 
selection  of  matter  or  in  its  mode  of  treatment,  could 
be  obtained,  has  added  greatly  to  the  labor  and  diffi- 
culty of  its  preparation. 

In  conclusion,  it  may  be  added  that  Practical  Pho- 
nography is  now  the  only  system  of  shorthand  that 
can  justly  lay  claim  to  having  a  series  of  text-books  that 
teach  the  entire  art  of  verbatim  reporting,  accurately 
and  fully  at  every  step,  from  the  very  beginningi 
through  all  the  elementary  principles,  and  up  to  and 
including  the  application  of  those  principles  to  every 
phase  of  the  most  rapid  and  difficult  shorthand  work. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE  BOOK. 


DIRECTIONS   TO   THE   LEARNER. 

THERE  are  several  ways  in  which  Phraseography,  as  pre- 
sented in  this  book,  may  be  studied  by  the  learner,  each  of 
which,  in  its  turn,  should  receive  his  careful  attention. 

I.  A  knowledge  of  the  Principles  can  best  be  acquired  by 
studying  the  Rules  (pages  117  to  157),  in  connection  with  the 
accompanying  illustrative  Examples  and  their  phonographic 
outlines  shown  in  the  List. 

II.  The  actual  phonographic   Forms  of  phrases  may  be 
most  expeditiously  fixed  in  the  memory — 

1.  By  constantly  recurring  to  them  in  the  List  and  carefully 
making  their  outlines,  either  actually  by  writing  them  with 
pen  or  pencil,  or  mentally  while  tracing  them  with  the  finger 
on  the  knee,  table  or  whatever  is  most  convenient. 

2.  By  thoroughly  learning  the  One  Hundred  Exercises  on 
the  Phrases   (pages  in  to  115),  and  practicing  them  from 
Dictation,  by  means  of  the  Key  (pages  163  to  1 68)  and  an 
oral  reader,  until  each  and  every  one  of  them  may  be  written 
with  accuracy,  precision  and  speed. 

III.  Especial  attention  and  study  should  be  directed  to  all 
words  and  phrases,  in  the  writing  of  which  there  is  anything 
exceptional  or  peculiar. 

Therefore,  the  outlines  of  Words  Written  out  of  Position 
(page  in)  and  of  Phrases  Distinguished  (page  158)  should 
be  effectually  memorized  and  put  to  use. 

IV.  When  the  writer  has,  in  this  manner,  mastered  all  of 
the  Principles,  as  well  as  the  Exceptions,  so  that  he  has  no 
hesitancy  in  applying  them  properly  at  all  times  and  under 
all  circumstances,  then,  and  only  then,  will  he  be  fully  quali- 
fied to  "  make  his  own  phrases." 

But  having  reached  that  point  of  proficiency,  he  has-  a  right 
to  consider  that  he  has  succeeded  in  making  the  Art  of  Pho- 
nography completely  his  own,  and  that  he  may  begin  to  put 
in  practice,  on  his  own  account  and  in  his  own  way,  all  its 
principles  of  abbreviation,  Phrase-writing  included,  fearlessly 
and  with  no  uncertainty  as  to  the  results  being  entirely  satis- 
factory. 


THE  PHRASE  BOOK 

OF 

PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY, 

A 

a  short  period    ?     A 

A  good  -•__  .j. 

a  short  time  ago    \ 

t  —  - 

a  good  deal  -•-  -  „- 

able  to  _S._ 

a  good  deal  of    • 

able  to  do  <v 

1 

1 

&  good  deal  of  a    • 

able  to  make  V^^  . 

1 

a  good  deal  of  the    • 

able  to  realize  \/^ 

T 

a  good  deal  of  their    • 

able  to  think  ^, 

a  good  many    •     ,  —  ^l^ 

about  a  _._ 

a  good  share   • 

No 

about  a$t 

a  great  _-rr. 

about  J»o\v- 

a  great  deal  _«•_ 

about  it      | 

a  great  deal  of  XT 

about  such 

a  great  deal  of  a  vr 

about  that    ( 

a  great  deal  of  the  -»T 

about  that  date    (| 

a  great  deal  of  their  -or 

about  that  day    (" 

j 

a  great  many    v—  -~~~^_s 

about  that  matter  C^-  —  v! 

a  great  share  \—  n 

about  that  time  C^ 

a  little  -<./' 

•s.              \,  —  s 

about  the 

a  man  

about  them  ^ 

a  most  jy^r?5>. 

about  this  (or  those)  f 

a  short  __  _ 

about  when  ^^v 

10            PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

about  whether    T~X- 
about  which  / 
about  which  a  / 

advantage  of  -'-_ 
advertising  a_V_ 
advertising  the.r_ 

about  which  an    / 
about  which  It  *> 

after  a  (wan)    JS^.- 
after  all    V. 

about  which  the   ^ 

f    1 
after  business  \  

about  which  there  .  / 

\q_pi 

after  business  hours        V_^ 

about  which  there  is    ^ 
about  you-r 

\^_j>/ 
after  he  V__/^v 

after  he  called  V__/-^_ 

above  a  -\. 
above  his  \ 
above  the     >* 

after  he  came  V_^-V__^~N 
after  he  came  there  V_^-x__^  —  -s 

after  he  had  ^_^->> 
i 

above  their    >v 
absolutely  necessary    °~  V.P' 

after  he  has  («/'  is)  V  —  s~b 
after  he  left  V  —  s-^/~- 

abuse  a.\^ 

after  he  received  ^_v^v/" 

according  to  

after  he  wag  V_^—\ 

according  to  a 
according  to  agreement 

after  him    v^_x~S 
after  his    >  —  o 

according  to  my 

after  his  death  V_o 

e-» 

according  to  that 

after  I  V^            C 
i 

according  to  the 

after  I  saw  him     >>, 
S       i 

account  book         ^\ 

after  I  saw  him  there       ^? 

account  current 
account  sales          *£* 

(       ,  ^-s  *•  —  ^ 
after  looking  >  —  1 

after  me   v^  —  ^    in    \_ 

act  of  Congress 

after  she   V_^ 

act  of  Parliament       \f 

after  such     V^o 

acts  of  Congress 
acts  of  Parliament  ~\f 

ad  valorem    _Q|. 
V  —  „ 

after  that  \^^ 
after  that  date    V_^ 

V    l 

after  that  day  V_ 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.         n 

after  that  time  -^  - 

al.its.C_ 

after  the  V_, 
after  the  other  V^ 

all  of   ' 
all  of  her   '  ~^\ 

after  them   V_     V 

1    ( 
after  they    V_ 

all  of  it  ' 
all  of  mine 

after  they  had      v_    M-  ^~. 

,-~~  
all  of  my 

(\ 
after  they  have  V     | 
/           /  1 

all  of  our  

(      u 

after  this  V^ 

after  we    x^. 

i 

all  of  that   '_  _^ 
all  of  the   ' 

after  which  V«_ 

A 

after  which  it    V^ 

7  ( 
after  which  it  may  x^_^ 

all  of  the  other// 
all  of  their  ^\_ 
all  of  them     ( 

\. 
after  which  it  muni  V_^ 

all  our 

after  you-r   V  —  u    e^,  V  —  „ 

all  our  own. 

after  you  become  V^.^^ 

all  persons 

after  you  were  Vwv/ 
after  your  own  V^ 

/ 
all  right    ' 

all  such  '/ 

again  a  .  ^_  . 

all  that 

ngain  and  again     —  . 

all  that  a 

against  the  _—  jt?-- 
against  us   ^-^ 

all  are  aware            A 

ail  that  has 
all  that  I   ^ 
all  that  IB  ' 
all  that  may 

all  are  ready 

r~° 

all  classes 
all  directions 
all  have   ' 

all  that  she   _J 
all  that  they  '  / 
all  that  we 
all  that  you 

all  have  been 
all  have  been  there      *x. 

all  that  you  can  ' 
all  that  you  have    (j 

12         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

all  that  you  may  

alongside  of  the       ?rC, 

all  that  your 

alongside  of  their   ^-P 

all  the/T- 

although  a._f_\,_ 

all  the  other-  A 

although  it    f* 

all  the  others  | 
/-Vo 

although  it  has  ( 

all  their  I  .  . 

although  it  has  not   /^ 

all  their  own 

although  it  has  not  been   r^*\ 

all  this  '  * 

although  it  is   i 

all  this  business      v^j^ 

although  it  is  not  f**-' 

all  this  time      V 

although  the    1 

all  those     *° 

although  thr        if 

all  will  &_ 

although  there  is     II 

all  you-r 

*°/f 

although  there  is  not    '/ 

all  you  have    V 
all  your  own     " 

^o^/T 

although  there  is  nothing  // 

si                          ^i--/ 

although  this    ,'  (                         \^ 

all  yours     « 

although  this  case  f( 

Almighty  Father  .f^_ 

always  be_      ^\           ° 

Almighty  God  "  — 

f\Sl 

always  ready 

almost  always  *"""*     " 

always  there 

along  a  _StX 

always  was          A 

^_^/  y 

along  about     —  "•> 

always  were/       a^ 

along  about  that  time     —  *S 

am  a  

along  after   V-l 

am  I  not 

C 
along  the  ^~--i 

am  not 

along  their   V  -• 

among  a  ..X_XN_  _ 

along  their  path    x^_-^-^ 

among  all    <^_y 

along  there   X.  s 

among  all  his    ^_P 

alongside  of    >«-P 

among  all  their    ^L  / 

alongside  of  a  ^~—f 

among  all  their  own   <*^^^^/ 

PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE  BOOK.           13 

among  an  _  >  z.  _ 

and  I  (7i/  

among  as     >_> 

and  I  may  

among  his    ^~J> 

and  I  think   ^f   . 

among  its     >^j> 

and  is  

among  other  "x_^ 

and  is  a-n  _ 

•*> 

among  other  things   x_^"^_i> 

and  is  it   _    ' 

among  our    t^* 

and  is  it  as 

among  our  own    s^j> 

and  is  not  

among  the    ^_, 

and  is  the  .     . 

among  the  best    —  v 
among  their   x^_  s 
among  their  own    ^_^-v_^ 

and  is  thr    -^_  - 
and  so  forth  -\-r. 
and  that  _\  _ 

among  us    •*_  -^     f^V     •«-    o 
among  you-r    \^s" 
among  your  ov.-n  ^^ 

and  that  has  (or  is)  * 
and  that  has  been   N^ 
and  that  has  (or  is)  not    *•* 

and  a-n 

and  that  has  not  been    ^Xj 

and  h-as  

and  that  has  (or  is)  nothing  VL  .., 

yo 

,ind  h-as  a  
and  h-as  it  

and  that  has  (or  is)  the   « 
and  that  that    ( 

and  as  it  has  (or  is)  _  _  . 

and  that  the  A  _ 

and  as  it  has  (or  is)  not  f^_ 

and  that  thr   ^ 

and  h-as  the 

and.  that  there  has  (or  is)  (^ 

and  h-as  thr  _</_ 

and  the 

j* 

ami  as  there  has  (or  is)    Cf, 

and  as  there  has  (or  is)  nothing  . 

and  the  other    > 
and  then  (, 

and  as  to  _*•_  . 

and  this  _/__ 

an<!  as  to  a  __  _ 

anil  this  has  (or  is)_/^_ 

and  as  to  the    ",  _ 

and  this  is  the./  _ 

and  has  not      r*_ 

and  >et  _(_ 

14             PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK 
i 

another  affair             \  
~~        ^ 

any  part  of  

another  day 

any  part  of  it  (or  the) 

another  instance 

any  part  of  their 

another  point 

any  party 

another  thing        — 

any  person          .. 

any  better 

any  special    ^^^ 

any  better  tlvan  ^ 

N 

any  statement  ^^^ 

any  body  O 

any  subject 

any  boily  else 
any  body  else  there  «  ^ 
any  business 

any  worse    ^^^rx 
anything  about  .  - 

anything  beside 

any  business  there     —  9 
any  interest 

anything  else 
anything  further 

any  more          x 

anything  less              f 

any  more  than           

anything  like   ^.^C 

any  of       —  , 

anything  more    ^_^,t  —  ., 

any  one 
J 
any  one  else 

anything  more  than               ^_^ 
anything  more  than  that               ^_ 

any  one  else  there    fc 

anything  more  than  the 

any  one  of  the                  Cf 

anything  more  than  t'lr^_^  ^ 

any  one  there              *• 
any  other                        u 

anything  said 
anywhere  else  _  _  _/ 

any  other  party 

are  a  

any  other  payment 

/A 

are  about 

any  other  person              .. 

are  all    *^ 

any  other  subject 

are  as     ' 

any  other  thing 

are  not    " 

any  other  time 

are  of 

any  part 

are  our 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        15 

are  the  

rX^-^S. 

are  you  certain  about  ___ 

X? 

/^  A 

are  thr  

are  you  clear   ^ 

are  there  many 

are  you  in  the  habit 

x( 

x^ 

are  they         v 

are  you  just  as    ^ 

are  those       « 

are  you  positive 

X-X* 

X\ 

are  we  _  _  _ 

are  you  positive  about  that          f 

are_  we  able  to 

are  you  prepared              ^") 

.ire  we  about    ^^ 

are  you  quite  clear                  i 

are  we  becoming            V_  — 

are  you  tiuite  sure    C*^ 

are  we  certain  about  ^ 

are  you  sure     £•  S 

are  we  deceiving   ^^  f 

C/\  ^—  ' 

are  we  decided           p 

are  you  ^ure  about  H     ^ 
1    J\ 

are  you  sure  about  that     ^\ 

are  we  deciding            J> 

x  xl       L^ 

are  we  doing  ^   l^^ 

are  you  sure  of  it  ,or  the)  <i-^_ 
are  you  sure  of  that    £"  ^ 

are  we  having           ^~^-x 

as  a  matter  of  course    ^_    "^ 

are  we  not 

as  a  matter  of  fact 

are  we  positive 

*u 

as  a  rule 

are  we  postponing     c/^   N. 

as  are  _°1  .                                             . 

are  we  prepared            \. 

as  did    P  . 

are  we  pretending             -1  

as  do_|_  _ 

are  we  sure    <-^-' 

as  early  as  _  Ji_ 

are  we  to  have   ^^  « 

as  early  as  it  is       Ir 

are  we  willing  t*s 

as  early  as  possible      IrSs 

are  you  _<--'_ 

as  ever    V^ 

are  you  able  to 

/  — 

e 

as  far  as     -~^\- 
o 

are  you  accustomed    ^ 

as  far  as  can    >  —  ^ 

are  you  acquainted   ^ 

as  far  as  has  (or  is)    V^^ 

f            O 

are  you  aware 

as  far  as  may    ^-^ 

^i  v 

are  you  certain     -x 

f>        O         \ 

as  far  as  might  V^^ 
o~^ 

16         PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

p 

as  far  as  our  _  :>^^< 

as  is  usual   -Q. 

as  far  as  possible     v-  ^ 

as  it  

S\ 
x> 

as  it  is 

r 

as  far  as  thr  V  

h\ 

as  it  were-'*^ 

Op 
as  far  as  there  is     ^-* 

ft       0 

as  far  as  they  sf.  _ 

as  large  as  _'__ 
as  lately  as_6r_ 

as  far  as  was  v_^ 

as  little  as  _jC? 

e*\ 

as  far  as  will    V  / 
^v  — 

o    ^ 
as  long  __ 

e  • 

as  far  as  you-r  ^  —  .. 

as  long  ago 

as  far  as  you  can  v  — 

ft,  \  

as  long  as    ^"^ 

v-T  — 

as  far  as  your  own  y° 
P 
as  fast  as  _"P_ 

?^7 

as  long  as  it 

<?,f7 

as  long  as  it  is 

as_for   v.  

as  long  as  possible  ^~xj 

as  for  that   v^ 
as  good  as  -^&- 

as  long  as  that 
as  long  as  thr 

as  good  as  any  other  ^ 

as  long  as  there  is   ^"^ 

as  good  as  ever 

as  good  as  possible 

>o 

as  great  jur_ 

as  long  as  they   ^"^ 
as  long  as  they  have    ^~\j 
as  long  as  this    ^3 

as  great  as    a^ 

as  long  as  you-r 

as  has  5?  _ 

as  long  as  you  have     €/ 

as  has  been  _>i_ 

as~  many  _<f7^  —  •/- 

as  he  _<5T"N_ 

as  many  as    <5~^.  —  P 

as  his  

as  many  as  possible     g  s? 

f                        O' 

as  I  <?4,  

as  matters 

as  1  am  

as  my   6    s 

as  I  think  _^ 

as  much  _  _  /_ 

asif.^_ 

as  near  as 

as  is  

•  as  near  as  you  can  fix 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE   BOOK.            17 

as  now  

as  we  have   ^"^- 

as  our  

as  we  were  <r\X' 

as  part  _  .  _ 

as  well  _b_ 

as  possible  

as  well  as     6 

as  shall  _•?_ 

as  well  as  can  be    t          \ 

as  soon  -o  

as  well  as  possible    fa     v> 

as  soon  as 

as  well  as  the     6 

QJ? 

as  soon  as  thr 

as  well  as  their    b 

as  soon  as  they 

as  would   ?"N- 

as  soon  as  you-r     \ 

as  yet  _  (-  _ 

as  soon  as  your  own 
as  such  .  £_                  * 

as  you  _  xp_ 
as  you  have    /^ 

_   

as  you  have  been    x*5 



t 

as  you  have  said    x"° 

as  that  an  _  __ 

as  your-/<?_ 

f 

as  that  the  v 

as  yours     /"" 

f 

as  that  thr  \^ 

r 

ask  him  '  ^^ 

,       a 
as  the 

ask  me      —  ^    ^    <^2/     — 

as  the  best  Tjto_ 

ask  them  *  —  7 
A    k, 

as  they  A  _ 

ask  you-r    —  " 

as  though  A  .  . 

astonishing  a  .  _  _ 

o 

\ 

as  to  

astonishing  the  " 

as  to  a  

ata.L 

as  to  another 

at  all    ' 

•  as  to  the  

f 
at  all  events  ^-" 

as  to  -whether    '?~>\ 

at  all  hazards  ^~!>~) 
p 

as  usual          <J 

at  all  the  

as  was     ^_ 

'     rf 

as  we    5*?y 

at  all  their  owr     u 

18             PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE  BOOK. 

at  all  times  __*_ 

at  sight  P 

at  an  .  _  _ 

k 
at  some   •** 
i 

at  another  , 

at  some  previous  time  '^v\ 

at  some  time  !f^~^                   U—  ^ 

at  any  rate  '—  • 

at  such   )> 

at  first  A_ 
at  his  • 

at  such  a  /*" 

^    1 
at  such  an  f/-*> 

at  his  own  ^—  -" 

at  that  < 

at  home   ^~^ 

at  that  date   C 
1      1 

at  last 

at  that  interview  <" 

at  least  S 

at  that  place  <i 

at  length  '  —  •r 

at  that  time  r 

at  most  ^^ 

.     1          U^ 
at  the... 

u 

V^ 

at  my 

at  the  last 

at  my  father's  ^~\ 

at  the  last  day  '    1 

at  my  house 

at  the  last  session 

at  my  mother's  ^~~^'     ~k 

at  the  moment 

at  my  residence  ^~^& 
r\ 

at  the  nexl  session        -.  *• 

at  once  ° 

at  the  present     \,^, 

p 

i 

at  one   J 

at  the  present  day  K\^ 

0 
at  one  time  r 

at  the  present  time    N^^ 

at  or  ' 

at  the  same 

at  or  about    v. 

at  the  same  moment 

at  the  same  place  <^X 

«t  *,,  ,,Mi    — 

^o 

at  the  same  time 

1 
at  our  house    '"'"* 

at  their  U 

at  owner's  risk  <J_P' 

"  cJ 

at  their  own 

at  present  \ 
^^  !              o^  

at  them   J 

at  sender's  risk    k^^^s*' 

IV 
at  this  } 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.         19 

at  this  period-/! 

i  v"  /i 

be  likely  ^yvT1  — 

Nyi 

at  this  time  / 
i  \~ 

be  made  \^ 

at  which  )    i- 

be  manifest  \^_^^ 

at  work      ^__ 

be  meant  N.^ 

n        i 

at  your     '    01,     f 

be  met  \._^ 

oi    j 

at  your  house          a  frt  s^ 

n         f-bi 

be  not  -„_ 

. 

at  your  own      .*•  —  '     Ms  f 

n 

be  ready    V/J 

at  your  place    i 

^0                         /~| 

be  received  \x*- 

'  1 
at  your  place  of  business    < 

be  regarded   \x?      1 

N«3p 
at  yourself  ^ 
*>        1 

be  regretted    V      / 

at  yourselves   /^ 

be  requested    X.X  —  p 

attain  a./J-  - 
Attorney  General     \. 

be  said    \_ 
be  seen    V 

B 

Baggage  master     '  —  -j 

be  seen  that  \ 
be  seen  there  V 

bank  account    ^-*" 

be  such   N^ 

bank  note    ^—  ^ 

be  sure   \ 

be  sustained  \,-j 

be  a     >y 

be  that  \ 

be  able  to   \ 

be  the  

be  an   N. 

be  the  fact 

be  certain   \_ 

be  thr    V 

be  consistent  >^ 

9 

be  they  \ 

be  done  V 
be  glad  V  « 

be  this  N 
be  thought    V 

be  good  enough   V 

be  thought  that  \ 

^"^--^ 
be  it 

/x 

be  it  resolved        /* 
NX 

be  told  that  \      ^ 

CV/" 

bear  in  mind    .  J. 

be  kind  enough.  \ 

bearing  date  _  _ 

20            PHONOGRAPHIC 

.  PHRASE  BOOK. 

bearing  in  mind  _  _  _ 

before  I  \f. 

bearing  interest 
became  acquainted  \__v^-x 

before  I  do  or  had)  \rl 
before  it  _\>_ 

because  a  (or  I)  
because  I  was       ) 
because  it  is 

before  no  other     \»^_x 
?  i 

before  or  after  \f 

before  or  since  \j 

because  it  is  not        t/ 

before  the  V 

because  it  may       \^~^ 

before  the  country  \s-/ 

because  the 

before  the  nation  \y-I2 

because  thr 
because  there  is 

before  thr  \_  - 
before  you-r  v, 

because  tbey       V 

before  you  can  Xu  

because  this   ~=£- 

before  you  shall  \i^ 

because  you 

begin  again  

because  your            <^-     f 

beginning  a 

become  acquainted  \      -  _ 

beginning  the 

V 

become  of    \    .-> 

being  thr  \^  _ 

become  of  the  \_= 

believe  a  5^  _ 

become  of  their  \  _=> 
becoming  a     \  , 

believe  that  V. 
believe  the  (or  it).     _ 

becoming  the  \  , 
been  a   X-  -t 

believe  thr  S. 
believing  a  ^ 

been  the  -  y-  - 
been  thr  _\_  _ 
before  a-n  N^_  _ 
before  and  after  \fi 
before  and  behind   VV 

believing  the    ^ 
best  impression  \fT*\\ 
best  of  my  belief    X~\ 
best  of  my  knowledge  X""^  —  -1 
best  of  my  memory  ^fV~v*>X 

before  another  \>*-__^- 

before  any  other  \i 

best  of  my  recollection  \T^^ 
be«t  recollection  ^^ 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        21 

better  off  _N 

but  an  ^  

better  than  ^> 

but  another  >^    . 

between  that  _|_  - 

but  as  \> 

between  the  -j-- 

but  as  the  \> 

between  thr_  \__ 

but  I  am  \<_^ 

between  them   J 

but  I  am  not  X^ 

between  themselves    | 

but  I  am  not  positive   >_^ 

£ 

\ 

between  those     1 

c 

but  it  N_  _                         [ 

between  you-r       1 

but  it  has  (or  is)  No 

between  you  and     1 

but  it  has  or  is)  not  Vq_^ 

between  yourself     1 

/O    ^ 

but  it  has  (or  is)  nothing  V, 

beyond  all  ' 

V   f~        \        (^    —  ' 
but  lately  V       rt,  \    r 

beyond  the 

but  littleNr 

beyond  thr   ( 

but  not  JS.  _   . 

bill  book  X-/TS. 

but  one  X_  _ 

bill  of  exchange  \J^~/> 

but  such  as  \> 

bill  of  particulars    \ 

\ 

but  such  as  are  V 

bill  of  sale  V^X^t0  V 

bills  payable  \/A     C 
\    JL 
bills  receivable     \*f*     V^^X 

bona  fide  \.                        <°/Vc 

but  such  as  were    X> 
but  that  \ 
but  that  has  or  isj\ 
but  that  has  (or  is)  not  \ 

book  account  \    1 

but  the  X_  _ 

book  debt    V 

but  their  own     o 

book  entries  \ 

but  themselves  X 

branch  of  _^~r1 

but  there   o 

British  America  -,^-     / 

but  there  are   X 

burden  of  proof  V**V 

o 

hut  there  is    O 

business  there  \^- 
but  a    J^  -  _ 

but  they  have  not  X 

o            V" 

but  we   \ 

22            PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

but  we  believe  _V__ 
f\    \ 

by  that  _C_  . 

but  we  must    V—  * 

but  we  think  \     /T^    j 

but  you-r     \ 

by  the  _\  _ 

by  the  by      ^ 

but  you  have      >> 

by  the  fact  \_ 

X 
but  you  may      >^~x 

by  the  way  ^"^ 

but  you  were     \r 

by  thr  »J 

by  a  _N 

by  their  own  *5 

by  all  ^ 

by  them  ^ 

by  all  thr   ^ 

V 

by  themselves  } 

by  an   * 

by  this   or  those1,    f 

by  and  by   ^ 
by  another  ^  

\    ^ 

by  this  time      / 

by  this  account  ^    '  ^ 

by  those  accounts  ^ 

by  him    v^> 
by  his  ^° 

by  his  own  ^*  —  ' 

\'°  VJ> 

by  way  ot    ^N 
by  which  / 

by  it  _  _  _ 

by  which  means    }^ 

by  its  __ 

by  wliitli  you         ^/ 

by  its  own  Ji^'_ 

c\ 

by  you-r 

by  little^* 

c 

by  many  ^"^ 

call  for  S>— 

by  me  (»/•  my)  ^"^ 

call  forth            k 

by  mine   ^^   5 

call  me  "~  ^^    ^  at  "~ 

by  my  own   ''"    ^^  —  ' 

call  them        C. 

\ 

by  our 

call  thr 

by  reason  ^ 

•=  —  v 

call  upon           o 

by  Mtme  •""» 

call  you-r 

by  Bucb    /° 

call  your  own     € 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 


23 


n  they        (. 


ca 


can  we 

can  we  be          V 


can  you-r 


can  you  fix 

can  you  mention 

CT 
can  you  name 


can  you  not 
can  you  speak 

c-f 

can  you  state 

can  you  tell 

can  you  tell  how  much 

can  you  tell  me  how  mucrT  l^^~*s~\ 

can  you  think  <-   r 

can  you  think  of  anything7"^ — *^/ 

can  you  think  of  anything  else 

cannot  be  "^ 

cannot  be  made 

cannot  be  received 

cannot  be  sail 

cannot  be  sure 

cannot  go 

cannot  say     ) 

cannot  see  JH_ 

cannot  understand 

cannot  you   \ 

care  of 

care  of  the 
care  of  their 
carry  away    ~ 
carry  on 
carrying  away 
carte  blanc'r 


aid    ~V^ 
"*} 


che      \ 


24         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

cash  price     \ 

\3 

charitable  uses.Sv- 

casus  belli  Q:-/^-  - 

charter  party  '^v 
V    A 

Catholic  Bishop    _      ^v 

PS/I 

chef  d'oeuvre  ~* 

Catholic  Church          / 

chief  clerk  7^— 

—  7/ 

4  

Catholic  priest      ^N^ 

Chief  Justice   /   
y 

cause  a  

child  of  God  f.TL 

b 

cause  of  action 

children  of  God    /?  _ 

caveat  emptor         \^  -x 

children  of  Israel     /' 

certain  about    o^~  —  "X 

children  of  men    T7/ 

certain  extent  <•     S 
f\ 

Christian  brethren        .~ 

P 

cestuy  que  trust  _l  —  -n.  _ 

Christian  brother           „. 

P      ' 
cestuy  que  use  1 

pT 

Christian  character          ^  

cestuy  que  vie  L  

Christian  Church 
c  —  y 

/                  / 
change  a.  7.  _    ff^    _«.. 

Christian  religion      /        /I 

change  of  i 

Christian  society       f~) 

change  of  the  -i-  - 

Christian  system         Q 

change  of  their  _/  _ 

Church  and  State  ./_ 

changing  a  / 

T 

Church  of  Christ     / 

changing  the   / 

Church  of  England    7 

/     "        / 
charge  a  _  _  _  0b  

Church  of  God  / 

n 

Charg^  d'Affairs  _  *£- 

1 
Church  of  Rome   7 

r     i             I 

charge  of  l~» 

Circuit  Court     YjA'    s 

charge  of  a 
/ 

Circuit  Court  of  the  U.  S.       T^y 

charge  of  anything     —  /^-^' 

circumstances  of  the  case  r^~° 

t 

charge  of  the  

circumstantial  evidence    J 

charge  of  their./.  _ 

citizens  of  the  U.  S.  .  P 

charge  of  their  own  L,  - 

U 

City  of  Boston  -P-. 

charging  a   - 
charging  the    - 

City  of  New  York     J  P 
Civil  Law_f^j^ 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        25 

civil  list  --Of 
civil  power     ^_^ 
civil  service  reform    i  ^./Vo/V 

contrary  to  that  --  -C 

T/l 

contrary  to  the     . 
T/j 
contrary  to  their 

civil  suit    O1 

I 

civilized  world     f> 

11      \o 
corpus  delicti     _  _  _^"        1 

correcting  a   c  1 

clerical  error            ^ 

correcting  the    c  —  •  1 

close  by  _c  —  o_  _ 

costing  a  

collateral  facts  ^~^_ 
collateral  warranty  c~t^ 

costing  the  
could  all 

collecting  a  c  / 

could  all  their 

collecting  the    c  .  —  i 

could  ever 

colored  race   c 

could  have    3 

comes  down  .  —  p_  _ 

—  ^^t 
commanding  officer          ^*s. 

could  it 
could  never 

)    . 
commissioner  of  patents           -)-- 

could  not  

common  carrier  v_y  "•                 J 

could  not  be 

Common  Council  ^~i^ 
common  law  " 

Common  Pleas  ^/\o 

. 

common  scold/ 

could  not  say 
could  not  see 
could  not  understand   _ 
could  not  undertake 

common  sense 

could  our 

compound  interest  jV^"*7 

could  that 

condition  jjrecedent  -Lex- 
Con  federate  States   v_n 

confidential  communicationV 

1  j-^> 
Constitution  of  the  U.  S._P.. 

could  the 
could  the  other 
could  thr    \ 
could  their  own 

constitutional  amendment      f 

I/ 

contested  election    L  — 
contrary  to  __  _. 

could  there  be   _ 
could  they 
could  this  (or  those) 

26            PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

could  we   

criminal  jurisprudence       .  .  . 

could  we  ever 

cross  action 

could  we  have         ^— 

cross  bill         \ 

could  we  not 

cross  examination 

could  you  

current  money   /1^~^~-—  ' 

could  you  ever  t  

Custom  House         U  —  \^*  ^ 

could  you  have    = 

D 

could  you  name   ,  —  N 

Danger  of     t 

could'you  not    ^ 

danger  of  a    J? 

could  you  state    o 

danger  of  the    t 

could  you  tell 
counter  affidavit               _  ^~. 
counter  claim 

danger  of  thr  L« 
dangerous  weapon  U 

u    *s 

dare  not  ^^ 

county  court  

l/*. 

dare  not  say       j 

course  of  business  _c  —  ^.  _ 
n    ^-* 

dare  say  "^    r 

court  martial  _c^T^/ 

day  after  day 

Court  of  Appeals    =-\ 

L  . 

day  after  to-morrow  |   1 

Court  of  Bankruptcy     c-  \«^\ 

1                          \       / 
day  of   t                        V—  N/ 

Court  of  Chancery   C-T^ 

day  of  the  I 

Court  of  Claims    c-c  /•    b 

day  of  the  date  L 

Court  of  Common  Pleas   c-^_x 

day  of  the  week   lr-v 

Court  of  Equity   <rf 

day  of  their   1 

i  V/i 

Ci.iurt  of  General  Sessions   cj 

day  or  two  V  1 

court  of  justice  crj 

</             9- 

day  time   I'-x 

court  of  record   t>  c—  / 

days  after    b 

Court  of  Sessions    <r* 

—  ^1 

days  afterward       b 

Court  of  Special  Sessions    c-e 

days  intervened  t^^  ,. 

court  record    ^-S 

dear  friend  _1__ 

courts  of  justice    cf 

i 

dear  madam  1 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        27 

dear  sir  -J-  - 

did  not  undertake        _ 

•L  i 

defendant's  counsel   J  .•-> 

i 

did  not  you 

delivering  a  _  P  _ 

did  that  _J__ 

delivering  the    f 
i  — 

did  the       _ 

depend  upon  L 

did  they    j 

Ni     i 

depend  upon  it  \or  the)  I 
1 

did  we.pS 

depend  upon  thr  L 

deputy  marshal  1    —  ^-yb 
1 

did  we  believe   p 
did  we  call    p^ 

deputy  sheriff  I 

1    y 

did  we  claim   p 

derive  a  _^_      V  
I 

did  we  do  _O_ 

derive  the  > 

did  we  ever  '    Ci 

I 

derive  their  _l_  _ 

did  we  get    p  v- 

did  a  .J_  . 

did  we  go  p 

did  he   | 

did  we  have    p 

did  he  ever    j 

did  we  make,     p 

did  he  have   l_^- 

did  you    H_ 

did  he  make  1^^ 

did  you  ask    "r  ' 

did  he  say    j 
did  he  tell  1       ) 
did  he  tell  you    1  
did-it                         ^ 

did  you  become    fj 
did  you  believe    C\   ^  
did  you  belong   f| 
did  you  calculate  ^~^  C\ 

did  not        . 
J 

did  you  call      ) 

did  not  do       , 
f 

did  you  claim  f~\ 

did  not  have  ' 

did  you  deliver  H 

did  not  know 

did  you  do  _(Y     1 

did  not  say     . 
did  not  see      j 

did  you  ever  '       H 
did  you  ever  claim  ^"-  O 

did  not  think  * 
f 

did  you  examine   C\             ^  ^~N 

did  not  understand     . 

*•  f 

did  you  furnish  H 

28         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

did  you  get    /_j_  _ 

did  you  purchase  Q  

did  you  give  f~| 

did  you  read  /^  /I    /^ 

did  you  go  f) 

did  you  receive   ^"]y€ 

did  you  go  down  stairs  f~\ 

did  you  recognize  0  X^_p 

did  you  go  there  r\               /j 

did  you  refer   f\,? 

did  you  have    H 

did  you  regard    C\   f~ 

did  you  have  any    Q 

did  you  remain  thr  C\ 

did  you  have  arrylbusiness 

did  you  remember  (~\     •*       ^  • 

did  you  have  arryjinteresf 

V^—-^^__^^ 

did  you  render  f~\     ^^ 

did  you  have  an^J  interview 

did  you  retjuest  C\   /   ^, 

did  you  have  aiVyjother 
did  you  have  an^other  interv'w 

did  you  say       (~\ 
did  you  say,  sir    )  C\ 

did  you  have  anything  O 
IA-  —  ^^ 

did  you  see        O     J-^ 

did  yon  have  anything  else  0 
v^^-V—  ^ 
did  you  have  anything  to  dofl 

r^i 

did  you  see  him  ,/           f\ 
did  you  see  him  there  C\    )—~^ 

did  you  have  anything  to  sayfj 

v^_x^x\ 

did  you  sign  C\              )^  .x 

did  you  investigate  rj 
r\        ^~"\ 

did  you  sign  your   C\ 

did  you  keep   r  J               Vo_ 

did  you  sign  your  name  C\ 
•*—  *V^"~N 

did  you  know  H  ^ 

did  you  look  QX 

did  you  sign  your  own  <\ 
did  you  sign  your  ownlname 

r 

did  you  look  after  f\/"        I 

T 

did  you  suppose   C\ 
*«>o 

did  you  make  C\ 

did  you  suppose  the    O 

did  you  mean    C\ 

did  you  suppose  there  C\ 

did  you  mention  f~\ 
v"  —  -^) 

-O-         c'~o 
did  you  tell      A 

did  you  notice  f~\ 

—  "1 
did  you  observe  O     to 

l^s 

did  you  occupy  C\     if 

did  you  understand   C\ 

did  you  use   II 

1 

direct  evidence    L. 

*^  —  o 

did  you  pay  H             \ 

direct  examination   9  —  ~-~^ 
i 

did  you  proceed     C\ 

bf 

disbursing  agent  Jv 

V 

PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK 

29 

disbursing  clerk  -*V--  - 

do  we  ever    j 

l^**  > 

disbursing  officer  <rv 

District  Attorney          -1       > 

Cv_ 
_ 

do  we  go  L  — 

District  of  Columbia  -I-- 
1            L 

do  we  have   (, 

Divine  ISeing  U~A^          ^\ 

do  we  make  k-x___ 

do  all  .  f  _ 

do  you    _|__ 

do  another    |_ 

1          ^ 

do  as    b 

do  believe  J 

j        ^^ 

do  you  believe    J 

do  you  belong     J 

O     >»< 

do  you  call     J  

r*i 

do  have    t 

do  you  claim     J      ^  

do  not  (or  don't',  -J- 

do  you  do 

do  not  know   vj_^ 

do  you  go     l 

do  not  they    *) 

do  you  go  there     ' 

V 

do  not  think    ' 

do  you  have     t 

V 

do  not  understand   J  « 

do  you  have  anything  to 

do    (r^s^l 

do  not  undertake    4.  ^. 

do  you  have  to  gO-_lc  — 

do  not  )ou    --J 

do  you  imagine     I—  ^ 

r\   " 

do  the  _L_ 

do  you  know     [  , 

do  their   J 

do  you  know  of     \^) 

do  their  own  Cj 

do  you  know  -whether 

—  ""  —  "\ 

do  themselves  \ 

i     (D 

do  you  make     k-s 

do  these    I 

do  you  mean     \^—^ 

I  / 

do  they  1 

do  you  mean  to     |^> 

do  this       1 

do  you  recollect     I/ 

pC 

do  we  J_  . 

do  you  remember     l^~\ 

do  we  believe  J 

do  you  remember  whether  U-^ 

n    \ 

do  we  call    J 

do  you  say      1 

1 

do  we  claim   J      ^^ 

do  you  say,  sir     1 

do  we  do  .P. 

do  you  see     1          ] 

30         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

do  you  tell  -J._ 

during  how  much  of  /L 

do  you  think        1 

during  my    1 

do  you  understand     (^ 

during  that  1 

do  you  undertake  '  l^       . 

1                              «— 
does  a  ,}b-. 

during  that  time  J 
during  the  -„-  -       U-> 

does  he    J-v, 

during  the  latter  part  of  the 

does  he  have    f~^\ 

during  the  month 
V~ 

does  he  not   J-^ 

during  the  time 

does  he  not  have   J-j 

during  this       1 

does  his    O 

during  your    y° 

E 

does  not  say   L, 
I        / 

Each  ayi_<7l</_ 

does  that    k 

each  are    7 

does  the  b 

each  moment   /^ 

does  thr  b 

each  occasion   /-j 

does  your  \, 

each  of  / 

does  your  Honor    J, 
1           ^-*" 

each  of  the  -,  -  - 

doff  their  _l__ 

each  of  their  '/'  " 

doing  there  _t 

// 
each  of  these   6C 

don  their_J_  _ 

each  of  these  occasions 

done  a  J 

/              /  *"5 

each  of  those  "jfr"  " 

done  there    1 

each  of  those  occasions  / 

J 

don't  do    J 

t  ~) 

each  of  which    / 

9 

doubting  a  _i_ 

each  one  i/~ 

doubting  the  _i  _ 

each  other   ,  / 

down  a  ,_  _ 

c/ 

each  thing    / 

,      J 
down  the 

each  will     f> 

I 

/ 

down  thr.J  _ 

earlier  than     ^VO 

duces  tecum  ~p~ 

early  part 

PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.            31 

early  part  of  _\C\> 

ever  since  then  \^_,?_ 

earn  a    ^ 

ever  there  .L^  . 

easier  than   fX   _ 

ever  we  (or  would)  V^ 

East  Indies.     _ 

ever  you-r  V^ 

Eastern  States     t    _  >.  . 

everlasting  God  Sr1  -  /-\ 

1               J 
eftecting  a    v  /    t> 

everlasting  life    ^^ 

effecting  the  '•-.  , 

C    /^ 
every  little  while  Vr 

eight  or  nine   V 

every  one  V. 

eight  or  ten  l/J 

f 

every  time  V_ 

end  the    ^, 
Engineer's  Department  ^—  -f 

M 

enter  a   s  ^N                   »va 

Us 
everything  else  V,^^ 

everywhere  else      v/t 

evidence  in  chief  C 
1^  —  ^~~? 

enter  into   ^.^_^^^s\ 

ex  contractu  —  °-^n 

enter  into  the   x__^-^_x\ 

ex  necessitate   —  <jf) 

enter  the    v  ^ 

ex  officio  —  P     j     \ 

Episcopal  Church   \      ., 

ex  parte  —  o     A 

et  cetera  <|                   / 

ex  rel  e/ 

0 
eternal  life  ~j 

^^V_ 

—  & 
express  purpose         V     . 

even  a    1 
"  vr 

—  «i    W 

extra  session        ,t> 

even  the 

eye  witness  .  _\  —  f> 

ever  a_V,_ 

F 

ever  as  Vi, 

Face  a    ^y, 

ever  had   V_^ 

faster  than   ^ 

ever  has  been  Vc 

fear  of  God   ( 

ever  I   V^ 

feasting  a   (^ 

ever  is  Vo 

feasting  tlie    (^_^ 

over  more  V_^  —  -N 

federal  constitution    I--C/U 

ever  since  Vog 

federal  government    ^s/ 

ever  since  that  time  V?__^> 

I 

federal  officer    ^/\Q, 

32            PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

fee  simple   f 
-V^Z-* 

for  his  own  account_\^__y  —  v^ 

fellow  citizens  Vp 

for  his  own  interest  l^-ci_^^       ^ 

JfX 

fellow  creatures     Vic  —  , 

for  his  own  part  ^-o^s 

felo  de  se-W^H- 

for  his  own  sake  Vj^_^i__ 

few  circumstances  ( 
first  place   \e 

^v^ 

for  his  own  use  Vo/ 
for  how  many  V_x~sx  —  x  ' 

first  rate   Vo-' 

for  how  much  v/  —  **^~} 

first  time  Vc 

for  instance  vo 

five  or  seven          „ 

d 
for  its    vx> 

five  or  six  ^ 
five  or  six  years  ^- 

for  less  than  Vj  / 
for  many  VJ/'-\_x 

for  a.  \?- 

for  many  years   \^/~^^f 

for  a  little  while  ^>_y'~^i 

for  many  years  after  ^~-S~~^—j' 

for  a  n.oment   >>-^_ 

for  many  years  past  v^—  ^s  V~_ 

for  all     Q_ 

for  my  own  part   V_-~x^x,  ^ 

for  an     V» 

for  my  own  sake  ^^~^^?~  — 

for  another    I    __ 

for  my  part   '"-^"Nfy 

for  another  purpose  I 

for  my  sake  ^—  ^~~b  — 

for  certain  Va^  —  ' 

for  no  other  purpose  v~ 

for  collection    y^,        —  ^ 

for  not  V_^    or*   ^ 

for  ever  and  ever  V 

V^-, 
\^ 

.ur  ,,c    v^-s 

for  several   L^ 
for  several  years  v« 
for  some  little      {Jf~^J^~ 

for  he  is  ^o, 

for  some  reason  ^-4—  x/~" 

for  lie  was  ^->*^V 

/                    / 
for  his   Vo 

for  some  time  v_«~^  —  ^ 
for  something   ^--~s  / 

for  his  account  Vo      ^ 

for  such    \^a 

for  liis  interest    VA__>J' 
for  his  own  Vq_^ 

for  such  a    V^>  &L  \e 

r    T 

for  such  an    Va 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        33 

for  such  is  not  _  Js».  . 
for  that  ^, 

for  this  \f, 

for  this  purpose  Vw 
.     C=     * 

for  the  N_ 

for  this  reason  v^    ^  \> 

for  the  benefit  C_ 
for  the  first  time      N_ 
for  the  last  timeUU-ir^ 

for  what  V 
for  which  L 
for  which  their  (or  theyare)  ^ 

for  the  most  part  v-^v^ 
for  the  other  V^ 

for  which  there  is  v^ 
for  you-r  *>  —  u 

for  the  purpose  *  L 
for  the  purpose  of  L 

x> 

for  the  purpose  of  the  v_. 

for  the  purpose  of  their     (_. 

NO 
for  the  purpose  of  their  own  *—  . 

for  your  own  V. 
for  your  own  benefit  ^. 
for  your  own  sake  L      C- 

for  your  sake  V_ 
(L.  t       /i 

foreign  bills              v—  '   > 

for  the  purposes  t 
x> 
for  the  sake  of  U    -, 

forever  and  ever  C 
form  a  _>                 \. 

for  the  sake  of  the   Co-j 

form  the    ~ 

for  the  sake  of  their  C.  ^ 

forming  a  ^—  ' 

for  the  second  time   W^ 
for  the  support  v<j 

forming  the    —  ' 
four  or  five  V^V— 

for  their  I 

Friday  afternoon  N 

for  their  own  L 

from  a  "^             •*—  ' 

for  their  own  sake  Vs 

from  all 

for  their  sake  ( 

from  all  other 

for  them   *v 
for  themselves  V~, 

from  all  you-r 
from  all  you  have     (j 

for  there  has  been  I 

V_c 

from  another 

for  there  has  never  I 

from  day  to  day  1  1 

for  there  has  not  been  V^^ 
for  there  is  nothing  I 

from  generation  to  generation  Lf 

"^               ^ 
from  hour  to  hour 

34         PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

from  house  to  house  . 

future  time  -N. 

from  it 

future  world  i 

from  other  sources                (^ 

G 

from  our              &> 
from  place  to  place  \>  <o 

Gain  a    —  ^ 
gather  together 

•"    > 
from  that 

from  that  day       S 

.--> 

from  that  place         V 

XJ 

from  that  time       *j 

gathered  together 
generation  after  generation   L\ 
gentlemen  of  the  jury  /£.                c/ 
get  the    _, 

from  the  *~ 
from  the  time 

give  that  ____^_ 
give  the   _ 

from  their 
from  this  place        C 

-7 

from  this  time      \ 

from  time  to  time 

II 

from  town  to  town 

give  them  their  
giving  a  ,          V 
giving  the  ( 
glad  of  it  ^^ 
going  there 

from  week  to  week  ~^_  _"^_ 
from  year  to  year  ,s:s: 
from  you-r 
from  your  own    c 

gold  standard  u 
good  bye  
good  day 
good  deal  ,'tet  a  good  deal) 

from  your  own  knowledge    £L^ 

good  evening 

p 
further  cross  A  -  - 

V^r  o 

good  many  times       ^—  ^  * 

further  direct  V 
^•^1 

good  morning   _^  —  s__. 

•    t      L 

further  notice  V 
—  >~-/l 

good  night 

f                       b 
further  say  *\ 

further  testimony    V. 

good  while     (^^ 
good  while  ago      _^ 

future  cotirse.L.  _          •"*  —  ' 

good  while  since     <^ 

future  day  t 
future  state  y      \ 

govern  their    = 
grand  jury  y 

PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.            35 

great  advantage  _« 

had  as  A  . 

Great  Britain   e-<\ 

had  been  ^ 

Great  Britain  and  Ireland   <^\^> 
great  danger   c-i 

had  been  done  ^v 

1  * 

had  been  there  k^^ 

great  deal  (see  a  great  deal) 

had  gone  there  = 

great  extent   ^f 

had  had   (    el   ' 

r 

great  favor    c~. 

had  he    "" 

great  interest  <r^_>7 

had  he  been  there            ^ 

great  majority  c-'    ~y 

had  he  ever  """"I 

great  majority  of  cases  ^    ^2__£) 

had  he  not  ^" 

great  many  <_^  —  ^_^- 

hadit.L. 

great  many  cases  e?-~~^~~—^  —  *" 

had  its  *" 

*=-* 

J 

great  many  occasions  c-"     •  —  ' 

had  not  (or  hadn't) 

great  many  things   c—  —  -  —  --^_P 

had  not  been  >^ 

great  many  times   e-^~^  —  -I 

had  not  known         ' 

great  measure  c-"    -o 

had  not  understood  *  —  —  f 

great  number  of  <^\ 
great  proportion   ^\ 

had  or  not  * 

had  seen  ^—  ' 

great  while    <r^ 

had  the  

great  while  ago  A^__ 

had  thr  ^ 

greater  or  less    c  —  ^ 

had  there  been 

greater  portion  f~~~)  ^-, 

had  therefore    v 
1 

guess  not    a_s 

had  they  / 
P 

H 

had  we 

Habeas  corpus  \  —  y 
had  a    I' 

P 

had  we  done  1 

J         P 

had  we  gone  there             => 

f 

had  all  ' 

1 

P 

had  we  had   1 

o  1 

had  an  J 

had  vou 

had  another  J 

n 

had  you  asked     K 

36         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

n 

had  you  been  _  *^_  _ 

has  many_<o>-X 

71 

had  you  been  thr      — 
f\ 

has  not  

had  you  done     I 

nJ 

had  you  ever    I 

has  not  been         >> 
has  not  been  done  ^^> 

had  you  gone   '  —  ^ 

9>V       J 

has  not  been  thr       ^v 

had  you  gone  there                ' 

has  not  taken     i  , 

o 

had  you  known    *"  —  ° 

f 

has  that_v_ 

had  you  reference    *^ 

has  the  ?_ 

had  you  seen     ^_x 
f\ 

has  them  _C  _  . 

1 
had  you  understood     v,  o 

has  thr  .  .  _ 

halfa}^ 

has  there  been  <^\ 

half  an  ^ 

has  therefore  <-^~- 

half  an  to«r^*\ 
i 

has  this_£_ 

half  dozen       I 

has  to  _  _ 

half  of  ^> 

has  to  be  A 

hand  in  hand       —  ^ 

hath  a  A 

has  a-n  ? 

have  a  _7_ 

has  been    * 

have  an  ^^" 

has  been  done   S. 

have  another  ^^.  . 

has  been  found    "  \ 

have  been  ^~^ 

P               ^ 
has  done-J-  - 

have  been  thr  ^so_  . 

P 

has  had  ' 

have  done       J 

has  he  _f^. 

have  had  _1_  ^  

has  he  not.<rs._ 

have  it 

has  his  

have  its 

has  it 

have  known  ^~v—  y 

has  it  been  ^\ 

have  many 

has  it  not 

have  not  

has  just  beeno/^ 

have  said     ] 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.           37 

have  seen  _  T^r^ 
have  several    \_ 

having  had./t~\»xi-  - 
having  known  ^-\^_x^? 

have  such  7° 

having  said  ^-N^J> 

have  that  H( 

having  thr  V  —  •^^_^ 

have  the  v- 
have  thr  ^  — 

he  always  was  s-  Nol 
he  and  s—  ^ 

have  them  (or  they)    £ 
have  this  'or  those)    7 

he  called  s~^_ 
he  can 

t 

have  we  V« 

he  cannot 

have  you-r  ^-~ 
have  you  anything  ^  —  ^_-%  - 

he  change  7 
he  charge  / 

have  you  been  V- 

have  you  been  engaged  V" 
<^-7 

have  you  been  there  S>- 

^     C 

have  you  ever  >"-« 

he  could 
he  could  not 
he  didn.  _ 

have  you  ever  had  occasion^\ 

he  ever  ~^__ 

.1                              U3 

have  you  had  ^- 

have  you  known  ^*~^^   •? 

he  gave  ,  
he  give 

he  go 

have  you  never  ^""^  —  -^^ 

he  had  ^ 

have  you  no  ^"%N  —  " 

he  has    ^  —  & 

have  you  not     7 

he  has  been  '•'"N. 

have  you  nothing  ^-^  —  -f 

have  you  seen     p- 

I   x_^ 
have  you  told  S»- 

having  a  ^~^_^ 

he  has  done  x-  > 
he  has  never  ^~t>^^, 
he  has  not  ^  —  ?s^ 
he  has  nothing  s~^j 

having  been  ^^«—  ? 

0      \^s 

he  has  received  ^  —  ^~ 

having  been  thr  ^"\^     J 
having  done  ^~~^_-^ 

he  has  said  '^*^\ 

he  have   ,-—  j 

448468 


38         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

he  is  _x-v 

he  is  generally   ,  —  * 
J 
he  is  not  x—  t,^ 

he  wits  said  ^~N 
he  was  thr  x-v  1 
he  will  x^-^   / 

he  is  therefore  xTi 

he  would  .  ^ 

he  may  be   x—  v/  —  X 
he  may  have  x-  ~^-  —  -, 
he  may  have  been  x  —  ^^ 

he  would  have  been  , 

he  would  no  doubt  L 
—  1 
he  would  not   L 

he  may  have  been  thr  ^—  ^'"^ 

he  would  not  have    i 

he  may  have  done  so  ,  —  ^~p 
he  may  have  had  x-v^-p    ) 
he  not   s* 

he  would  pot  have  been    L 
heir  at  law.  _  r  
heirs  at  law     4x- 

he  ought  .  1  _ 

Y 

Her  Majesty  ~\-—N 

he  received  s-~*s~ 
he  said  x*t> 
he  says   x^s 
he  seemed  x  —  JTN 

/               -^ 
Her  Majesty's  Government     V  —  ^ 

"N         "^ 

Her  Majesty  s  ministers     v-  -^ 

-s                   *-^£> 

her  own      o 
here  and  there    T^^ 

he  shall.-< 
he  should    7 

hereinbefore  referred  j-v  _ 
him  a  _x^v_ 

he  spoke   ••  —  s^ 

him  and   x  —  b 

he  therefore    ^~        * 

him  another  x""~"~^ 

he  told  '  —  f- 

him  thr    ^  \ 

he  told  him  x    > 

his  own  .. 

he  told  me  x  —  x         ffl    *  —  x  -^_^- 

hither  and  thither    

-"^v 

he  told  them  x  —  (v 

holding  a  ev                     ( 

he  told  us  s  —  v    > 
he  told  you      ^\ 

holding  the  C^\ 
Holy  Ghost   x-^.     -. 

he  was  ^-^. 

Holy  Scriptures   -  —  B  \ 

he  was  a  x—  v 
he  was  not  X—N 

0 
Holy  Spirit   x  —  ^ 

honor  to  be       \ 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.           39 

honor  to  transmit  .  _J-^_  . 

how  has  it  (or  the)  

honorable  gentleman  _  7^7 

how  has  thr 

honorable  gentlemen  ^-r&_ 

how  have 

honorable  member  TTTT^  . 

how  I  ""^ 

honorable  senator 

how  is 

hope  of  \> 

how  is  it 

House  of  Commons 

how  is  that        * 

House  of  God 

how  is  the 

House  of  Lords 

how  is  thr 

House  of  Parliament          \f 

House  of  Representatives  *"" 

how  is  your 
how  it 

Houses  of  Parliament  ^~®\f 

how  it  is  (or  its 

how  a  

how  long 

how  are 

how  long  after              V. 

c.  —  > 

how  are  we 

how  long  afterward              v 
>  —  c> 

how  are  you-r 

how  long  ago 

how  as  to 

how  long  before                  \j 

how  can 

how  long  before  you  were          \*r 

how  do  you  |_ 

how  long  had  he  been  thr      U*       :> 

how  do  you  do 

—  >nl 

how  do  you  know       !*._/ 

!~\ 

how  long  had  you  been  thr       I 
how  long  had  you  known  hirr.  L^f"^ 

"                 1 

how  do  you  know  of          l^^j 

how  long  have               V- 

how  do  you  like          V 

how  long  have  you              >-^/ 

how  do  you  make         [^  —  „ 

how  long  have  you  been               N- 

x—  sA 
how  do  you  manage          l^-^_^ 

how  long  have  you  b'n  engag'iyy 

-—  ~^~\ 
how  do  you  mean           I-  —  ^ 

liow  do  you  remember         J,  —  ^ 
how  far  '     t 

-  —  ^—^^  —  7 

how  long  have  you  been  in  the»-      x 
country                       ,  —  •*^_~Zj^/^ 
how  long  have  you  been  in  thisV 
country                        „  —  •^^^£*—f   / 
how  long  have  you  been  tlir"^>-^ 

how  has 

how  long  have  you  claimed^- 

40         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

how  long  have  you  known  .  Sv^_^>.  . 

how  many  years  after  .TT^T/T^' 

how  long  have  you  kno\vnhTnTV^rN 

how  many  years  after  thatfc 

how  long  have  you  lived^~v_rf 
how  long  have  you  resided   \*ss 

how  many  years  ago^'    ^_ 
how  many  years  befo^^'^^^' 

how  long  previous                \ 

^^^_jy             Vo 

how  long  prior              \^ 

how  may  '     ^    N 

1                       u    *^"  —  > 

how  much            / 

how  long  since 

^""^'  —  > 
how  much  further              „/ 

how  long  since  you  """ 

how  much  is  that    ^"^^7  ^^~ 

how  long  since  you  have              (j 

how  much  is  thr           A 

how  long  was  he  gone        ~~^)^ 

how  much  money  ^^^~^-^__^ 

how  long  was  he  thr  '     '  —  ^^_^^ 

how  much  of            f 

how  long  was  it 

how  often  '    \^ 

how  long  was  that          *~l 
how  long  was  this  ^~^~^) 
how  long  were  you 

/^-c, 

how  requisite  **^ 
how  soon 
how  soon  after          '     ^ 

how  long  were  you  acquainted 

how  we 

how  long  were  you  there^^*"^ 

how  will  ^-^ 

how  many    '     ~    ""•  —  ' 
how  many  cases  *~ 

how  will  they      ^ 
how  will  we        ' 

how  many  days                    k 

how  will  you 

how  many  days  after                 b     x 

how  would  .  . 

how  many  is 

how  }-ou-r 

how  many  is  thr 

how  you  can 

how  many  more  '    ^^""^  — 

human  being-^--  - 

how  many  occasions  /^^~~^  — 

human  kind   v  

how  many  places                    xD 

human  life 

how  many  such  '    ^     ~~f 

\-_ 
human  nature 

how  many  times  '    v"~'"     ^U-j) 

human  race  ^_s? 

how  many  years  '""^     *~-g 

human  understanding 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE   BOOK.            41 

I 
I  admit  ./|^ 

I  am  obliged  -  -  5y. 
I  am  pleased        >^ 

I  advise  V^- 

I  am  quite  clear       ^  N. 

I  agree  .-  -  --  - 
I  am  _  . 

I  am  quite  sure       Zi^X 
I  am  resolved 

I  am  afraid 
1  am  anxious           c/ 
1  am  aware 
1  am  aware  of          \j 

I  am  responsible 
I  am  satisfied 
I  am,  sir           } 
I  am  sorry 

I  am  certain 

I  am  sure       ^s 

I  am  certain  that 

I  am  sure  of  it  (or  the)  ^? 

I  am  compelled          \ 
I  am  confident          ^J 

I  am  sure  of  that          / 
I  am  sure  there  is^y^ 

I  am  convinced          C^ 

I  am,  dear  sir       "1 
*> 
I  am  glad  ^^~ 

"^        /  —  vi 
I  am  sure  there  is  not      J 

I  am  sure  there  was    ) 

)       "^7 
I  am  sure  there  was  not      / 

I  am  gratified 

A  A~TV        * 

I  am  surprised          ^ 

I  am  greatly 

I  am  therefore            ^>  — 

I  am  inclined 

I  am  very        ^_ 

I  am  looking 

I  am  very  certain         V«>-*  —  ^ 

I  am  never               ^— 

I  am  very  clear       v^. 

I  am  nevertheless 

I  am  very  glad        ^-t_ 

1  am  no  more 

I  am  very  sorry       VoX 

I  am  not  
I  am  not  accustomed           [^ 
I  am  not  in  the  habit    ^"^ 
I  am  not  inclined           *"" 

I  am  very  sure        ^-O 

I  am  very  sure  of  it  ^or  the         \*-y 

^~~\          ^ 

I  am  very  truly  yours        V^   /• 

I  ask  you-r 

I  am  not  positive  ^^Np 
I  am  now 

I  beg  ^>  
I  beg  leave  \—  _/  v^ 

42         PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

I  beg  permission    \              _ 

I  can  tell  .T7L 

A                     ^^ 
I  beg  to    \_ 

/  -\ 

I  can  therefore       ^  

-\ 

I  beg  to  be    X-^. 

I  cannot 

I  beg  to  suggestX^ 
I  beg  you-r    \ 

I  cannot  answer 
I  cannot  be       "\ 

I  cannot  be  certain      %/^  —  ' 

I  believe  so  -v 
I  believe  that-o 
I  believe  the 

I  cannot  be  responsible      \/b 

1  cannot  be  sure       vj 
q>       -^ 
I  cannot  do     I 

I  cannot  say    / 

I  believe  thr   .< 
I  believe  there  is    -c 
I  believe  there  was    -V 
I  believe  we  -<.           / 

I  cannot  say  how     >—  », 
I  cannot  say  how  many     J—  v^^^_^ 

I  cannot  say  how  much    )~^s-^ 

/~P        / 

I  believe  you-r   < 

I  cannot  say  how  often    J~* 
/-?    Vi 

I  believe  you  have  '-v 
I  beseech  .-v 

I  call  thr  ^~D 

I  cannot  say  how  soon    )~-  ^_^ 

I  cannot  say,  sir     Jl 

T 
I  cannot  tell  ^J 

I  cannot  understand 

I  call  upon         \ 
I  call  you-r 

I  cannot  undertake                1  

/I 

I  conducted     '  —  -i 

I  call  your  Honor's  attention  f. 

I  could  •  -f-  -    • 

I  called  "* 

I  could  not  

I  called  upon        ^ 
I  can. 

I  could  not  answer                s 
I  could  not  entertain 

I  can  be          \ 

I  could  not  have  done 

I  can  be  there          \ 
I  can  do          1 

I  could  not  have  said          J 
I  could  not  positively        | 

I  can  state 

I  could  not  say               rt 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        43 

I  could  not  say  how  many 

I  do  not  feel.d__ 

I  could  not  say,  sir 

I  do  not  find  '  j) 

I  dare   k   _               *} 

I  do  not  know  ^  ^ 

1 

I  dare  not    " 

I  do  not  know  about  4  

I  dare  say  V  ) 

I  declare.  J  ..  j. 
1 

I  do  not  know  anything-  3_^,.. 
I  do  not  know  that  \  

I  decline  =  —  3 

I  do  not  know  whether  4     _ 

1 

I  decline  to  say  i= 

1           ) 

^\ 

I  do  not  know  which  \  ^ 

I  demand   "^ 
1 

I  do  not  think   ,) 

I  depend  upon    1 

I  do  not  think  there  is  A 

V 

f 

I  did   1 

I  do  not  understand  j  ' 

I  did  not 
T 
I  did  not  feel 

I  do  not  understand  it  $        „ 

\ 
I  do  not  understand  that  't^_j 

I  did  not  intend   f 

I  do  not  understand  you-r  3^__j 

I  did  not  know 

I  do  say  1 

I  did  not  notice 

I  do,  sir     (k 

I  did  not  say                b 

I  doubt.!.. 

\ 

I  did  not  see  ) 

\ 

I  doubt  whether    —  v 

I  did  not  think  )m 

I  entertain            J 

I  did  not  understand 
*  3 

I  expect          \  — 

I  did  not  understand  it 

i        f 

I  fail  ^, 

P 
I  did  not  understand  that        | 

I  fear  -"L  - 

I  did  not  understand  you-r          C 

1  find  ^^ 

I  differ  /j                                 ^{ 

•* 
I  forget.  V.  

I  do.l. 

I  forgot  _  JT- 

I  do  believe   J 

I  found.. 

I  do  maintain  |_ 

I  hadj._ 

I  do  not_.-J 

I  had  been  S^ 

I  do  not  desire   J) 

I  had  known  him    ••  —  ^"^ 

44         PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

I  had  not.  ... 

I  have  not  undertaken       ~^       \ 

I  had  not  been  \ 

I  have  seen  *—  ^ 

/i3 

I  had  occasion  

I  have  shown  ^ 

I  had  rather  * 

I  have  spoken    \ 

I  had  supposed  "^P 
I 

I  liave  taken   |  

I  have  

I  have  the  ^ 

I  have  a-n 

I  have  understood   ^~~-  —  f 

I  have  another  *"~-  

I  have  undertaken             \_ 

I  have  been  V 

I  hope  ^ 

I  have  done   J 

I  hope  he  may  /V_S^_^ 

I  have  found  ^> 

I  hope  I  may  'NV^_^ 

I  have  generally  y 

4 

I  hope  that    \ 

I  have  had    I 

I  hope  you  may     VV^^N 

I  have  just  / 

1  imagine  ._</. 

I  have  known  4     ' 

I  immediately.    _  ,/^~ 

I  have  long  ^—  •"" 

T    •     e           •**  1 

I  infer           v. 

I  have  long  since   t^-*^J> 

I  intend   ,  

I  have  never  c  —  \^_ 

I  intended  x^-^_^ 

I  have  never  been         \^ 

I  knew 

I  have  no.^,  , 

I  knew  of 

I  have  no  doubt.i  .    _ 

I  know  ^  —  > 

I  have  no  idea.  .^  ^.    _ 

I  know  a  ^  —  -s 

I  have  no  intention  i^^^_/^> 

I  know  that  x^_-j 

I  have  not 

I  know  there   ^.  s- 

I  have  not  been  ^^\ 

I  know  there  is  ^-^__^P 

I  have  not  had 

I  maintain  *-^_^ 

I  have  not  known  ^  ? 

I  maintain  that  ^__. 

1  —  -~—^ 
I  have  not  noticed               [ 

I  maintain  the  +^^ 

I  have  not  understood  's-^-__^> 

I  maintain  their  /_^ 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.           45 

I  may  j.  —  N_ 

I  might  not 

I  may  as  well  *•  —  fc 

I  must  /—  Q 

I  may  be    '•"x 

I  need  _^^    . 

I  may  be  able  to  /-  —  v 

I  need  not  say  ^  

I  may  be  mistaken  /.  —  *. 

I  never          V  

I  may  be  said  f  —  \ 

T 

I  may  be  sure  <-~\ 

y 

I  may  be  told  *"~~N. 

I  now 
I  observe    }f 
I  often    V3 

I  may  have  /-—  ~> 

I  ought 

I  may  have  been    ^-^ 

I  ought  to 

1  may  have  been  thr  *"^ 
I  may  mention  t^-*^~^_^) 

I  perceive  '-\% 
I  perhaps    _3n>_ 

I  may  not    ;—, 

I  presume  so  A. 
A      o> 

I  may  not  be   >-^a 

\        ) 
I  probably   _  \  . 

I  may  not  be  sure  /-a 

y 

I  may  not  be  there  /-^ 

A. 

I  propose  .  \ 
NO 
I  purpose        \y\, 

I  mean  -^^ 

I  remain  ^\^~s 

I  mean  the  {or  to) 

I  remark           s  . 

I  mean  their 
I  mean  to  be 

I  remember    V-~N 
I  said  f 

I  mean  to  be  able  to 

f 
I  said  so    I 

I  mean  to  do 

I  mean  to  have  ' 

X 
I  mean  to  have  it  (or  the) 

)4 

I  said  that     1 

-f 

I  said  they      I 

I  mean  to  have  their 
I  mean  to  say 
1  meant  ->-3__     ' 
I  might  
I  might  have  ^l_ 

I  say  so  ) 

I  say  that     ) 

(       \ 
I  say  that  you    } 

I  see  <. 
I  sent  ji^ 

46         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

I  sent  back  .  X_A  .  . 

I  stand/.. 

I  sent  lor  you-r  ^--v 

I  suppose  "\, 

o 

I  sent  for  your  letter  A-I 
I  sent  you-r  A^ 

I  suppose  so        j> 

&J 
I  suppose  that  ^ 

I  sent  your  letter  s,/-  — 

/            V 
I  shall  rl. 

I  suppose  the     NS 
I  suppose  thr    V) 

I  shall  not  contend     >' 

I  suppose  there  is  *^> 

I  shall  render  ' 

I  suppose  they    N,., 

I  shall  say  < 
)        < 

C    s 
I  suppose  they  have    yz 

I  shall  support0^. 

1  suppose  you     y^ 

I  shall  therefore  ./ 

1  supposed     Y 

—  '/ 

f  1 

I  shall  undertake  <^__^i 

Ithank-ed_^_ 

I  should    ; 

I  thank  them  ) 

I  should  be    ) 

f  V 

I  thank  you  v 

I  should  go  J 

I  think  _Y_  _ 

I  should  go  there  j 

I  think  he  { 

I  should  have  ,  f 
I  should  have  been  ~J 

I  think  I  have  been  -f 
I  think  It                    ^ 

I  should  never  / 

I  think  it  is  _ 

Ov 

-c 

1  should  not        . 
<J       . 

I  think  it  is  necessary 

I  should  not  be  -J-  _ 

I  think  it  is  not 

I  should  say    / 
)            >- 

I  think  so  4 

I  should  suppose     J 

^2—  f       x> 

I  think  that'  / 

T  signed  that      v 

py 

I  think  the      V 

I  signed  that  document  'j 

L—  <"3 

I  think  thr  -f 

I  speak  A  . 

I  think  there  are  •/ 

•v 

I  spoke  .  jk  . 

I  think  there  is  1  ^-\ 

1  spoke  of    \i 

I  think  there  is  not  / 

I  spoke  of  the  ^ 

I  think  there  were  1 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.        47 

I  think  there  were  not  _i  _ 

I  understand  you  have  said    TTfr.  - 

\xj 

I  think  they       1 

I  understood   ^  f 

I  think  they  are'  1 

I  understood  him  '~v  —  f^ 

I  think  they  were       1 
I  think  they  were  notvXf 

I  understood  that  '  f 
1  understood  them  (or  they)  "~-  f 

} 

J 

I  think  they  would  Y      \f 

I  understood  you  ^         P                V 

I  think  we  4 

I  undertake              i 

I  think  we  did    4 

I  undertook  /Vv-  —  ^\_ 

I  think  we  do    r 

I  used  ^ 

I  think  we  shall  '  Y 

I  want     » 

J 

^_ 

I  think  you-r  /  ~~~ 
\/> 

I  want  to    P 

I  think  you  had  •( 

I  want  to  call  your  attention? 

I  think  you  have  -/ 

I  want  to  call  y'r  Honor's  att'nP  LO 

I  think  you  may/ 

I  want  to  know  ?                       Cf 

\         L-           ^=> 

I  think  you  must  { 

v*^-^a 

I  was  / 
"  "<. 

I  think  you  said       •/ 

I  was  a  < 

I  think  you  were  {  J  / 
I  thought  .'_ 

I  was  about  S. 

I  was  absent  \. 
\  ^J"/ 

I  thought  that  ( 

I  was  going  ^~v_x 

J  trust     b 

I  was  not 

I  trust  that     I 

I  was  once  A. 
<    0 

I  trust  they  /> 

I  was  thr  / 

C^. 

I  understand            ' 

I  was  therefore  J 

I  understand  it  "~        f 

1  went  S 

1  understand  that  "*~     ( 

I  went  down  S 

I  understand  them  (or  they)  "      f 

I  went  down  there  S 

I  understand  you  ^~( 

I  went  down  -stairs  «  'T) 

a 

I  understand  you  have   ^~fo 

I  will    ..".     et-yf 

I  understand  you  have  been  ^~~/^ 

I  will  be  "N^ 

48            PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

I  will  be  glad    t\_ 

I  would  like  ^y^~ 

I  will  be  pleased  "V 

I  will  be  sure  "\     ^ 

"V    -^ 
I  will  have    ^~ 

I  would  like  to  have  ':^y 
I  would  make   *x 
I  would  not  _     _ 

I  will  not   "" 

I  would  not  be 

I  will  not  be  "\ 
I  will  not  be  certain   "\^_^ 
1  will  not  be  satisfied  "^Xp 
I  will  not  be  sure  "*v        *- 
I  will  not  say  _  )_  _ 

I  would  not  be  able  to 
I  would  not  be  sure  ,           >•* 
I  would  not  be  very       _ 
I  would  not  have             y_ 
I  would  not  know    , 

I  will  not  see  *f)  -  - 
I  wish   _2_ 
I  wish  it  _  .  _ 
I  wish  the  _ 

I  would  not  say 

I  would  not  take  / 
J 

I  would  rather  "^y/9  '  — 

I  would  rather  not  "S/^, 

I  wish  thr    -"}  -  - 

I  would  rather  say  i\/9 

I  wish  there  was        ^ 

if  a   ( 

I  wish  therefore    )  "^ 

if  all  .fN 

I  wish  to  be  _      ^ 
I  wonder  ^O*"- 

ifan.^- 
if  another-L  . 

I  wondered  1"V_  . 

if  he    (                O^ir   (^^ 

I  won't   -*-- 

if  he  can  (^  ^_^         trt-   (^_^ 

I  won't  be    'S 
I  won't  be  certain   S 

>r-^ 

I  won't  be  sure  *s 
I  won't  say  S 
I  would    "TV  .  . 

if  he  is   (   x-% 
if  he  is  not   (s_x—v 
if  he  was   ^-—  ^ 

I  would  be  ^-v 
I  would  go  '^v 

if  I  am  ( 

?  x 

if  I  can  (, 

I  would  bave   ^v 

ifit-^- 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.          49 

if  it  be  -       . 
if  it  be  not  ^ 
if  it  is 

if  they  ha*e.v    - 

if  they  -were  i 
if  this  ^ 

if  it  is  necessary 
Vi^_p/ 

if  it  is  not 

if  those  v 

if  we  i 

if  it  is  possible 

if  we  take  I 

if  it  is  unnecessary 

if  we  wish  (J~  — 

if  its    , 

Vo 

if  we  would  -*l 

if  not 

ifyou-r  ( 

if  possible  i 

NO 
if  she    i 

if  she  had  I      <«,  I 
if  she  was        I        | 
if  she  would  ,  \ 

if  so   i           r 

if  you  believe  t 
if  you  can  ^     ^^ 

if  you  find  I 
°^- 

if  you  have  V. 

if  you  knew  ^^ 
if  you  know  v  

if  such/  i 
if  that  i 
if  the 

if  you  must  ^__^_^ 
if  you  please  V 

if  you  think  v^3 
1 

if  thr.U 

•c                                 V 

if  you  were  ^^_^^ 

if  there  be  I 
if  there  has  been  I 

X^_o 

if  you  would  ^ 
immediately  afterwards  ^~^^f\ 

if  there  is  (                   ^ 
if  there  is  anything  v 

in  a  , 

in  a  clear 

if  there  is  not  I 

in  a  great  many  ^\._^-^^_^ 

—  Q-s 

if  there  is  nothing  i 

in  a  great  many  cases                       O 

if  there  were  I          /         ^•*' 

in  a  little           f^~ 

if  they  i 
if  they  are    1 

in  a  matter  ^_^ 
in  a  moment 

V  — 
if  they  are  not  I 

*_^ 

in  a  most 

50            PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK 

in  a  very  few,  

in  bank  -  - 

in  a  way 

in  business 

in  accordance  v_^-^_£> 

in  business  there 

in  addition 
in  advance 

U_P 

m  all 

in  chief 
in  communication          x__x-—  -^ 
in  company         V_^- 

in  all  circumstances 
in  all  kinds 

in  comparison 
in  compliance            • 

in  all  other 

in  conclusion                  —  ^ 

in  all  probability        - 

in  connection 

in  all  such                        ^ 
in  all  that 

in  consequence 
in  consideration  U 

in  all  their 

in  curia          / 

in  all  these  cases 
<^-S\ 

in  all  this  (or  those) 
in  another 

in  detail  ^ 
in  eacb 

in  effect 

in  another  case              o 
in  another  manner             —  ^_^ 

'Desse  >  
in  evidence  

in  answer                s* 

in  existence  ^  ^     p 

in  any  ^_^^^ 

6 
in  extenso  ^  ^     P 

in  any  business 

in  extremis  v  _     ^   j 

in  any  case   ^_^-^_  o 

in  fact 

in  any  instance 

in  favor 

in  any  other 

in  full               V. 

'  —  v 

in  any  other  business 

in  future      r 

in  any  other  than 
in  any  other  way 
in  any  way 

in  futuro 
^-1 
in  general           I/ 
</ 
in  gross  ^-—  o 

in  anything 

in  his 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        61 

in  his  absence     . 

in  our  own-  --,.,- 

in  his  annual 

in  person  ^_^v 

in  his  business  ,  „ 

in  personam  ^^_jv^ 

in  his  judgment 
in  his  own             /^> 
in  his  own  affairs 

in  point  of  fact 
in  possession 
in  preference  ^_^\    x° 

in  his  own  business               o 

in  preparation        r\ 
N.    'O 

in  his  own  name 

in  presence  ^__jx 

in  his  speech    Q 
in  his  testimony 

in  progress  v  f 
in  proportion  ^_j\ 

in  like  _^ 

in  pursuance 

in  like  manner                —  ^___^ 

in  re           /' 

in  loco  ^^( 
in  March  ^^  —  -> 

in  receipt 
in  reference           ? 

in  most  cases                  f~) 

in  regard 

in  my 

in  relating  ^_**_^ 

in  my  life               /'t 

in  relation            / 

iS 

in  my  presence 

in  respect  ^^ 

in  my  speech  ^_^_. 
in  opposition          V^ 

in  response  ,..  _ 
in  return 

in  or   ^  _, 

in  short-hand 

in  or  about  ^ 
in  order 
in  order  that 

in  sight 
in  situ        ,, 
in  so  many 

in  order  that  you  may 

in  some  .-zrr^  . 

in  other 

in  some  cases  ~a    s  —  & 

in  other  ways 
in  other  words            ^y^ 

in  some  instances  -g  —  ^__p 

io 

in  some  respects  «  —  N/\_D 

in  our 

in  some  way  ?r^--s 

52         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

in  statu  quo  -<_z>- 
in  such  ^a 

in  the  latter.^-Jl  - 
in  the  latter  end  ^J 

in  such  case  ,, 

in  the  latter  part      ( 
*         *^i 

in  such  cases  „ 

LO 
in  such  matters 

in  the  latter  part  of  ^J 
in  the  midst 

in  suit 

X~N 

in  terrorem              / 
^1/ 

in  the  next  place  ^x^_,) 
in  the  night  ^ 

V 

in  that 

in  the  past 

in  that  matter 

ia  the  presence  ^~ 

in  the 

in  the  present  v_r. 

in  the  afternoon 

in  the  present  case  ^_ 

in  the  business 

in  the  present  instance  ^% 

^^--V^    o 

in  the  case  ^     o 
in  the  city 
in  the  city  of  ^_. 
in  the  city  of  New  York 
in  the  course      o                f' 

in  the  second  place  ^^                 a 
in  the  way 

in  the  way  of  ^_^_ 

vj 
in  the  winter  time 

in  the  words  of  my  *ex'yvU—  >, 

in  the  course  of  debate  v_f—  p 
in  the  course  of  this  debate  v_>.  s> 
in  the  day  time                             i- 

in  the  world  ,__/ 
in  the  year 
in  their 

in  the  early  part  ^_^^ 

in  the  early  part  of 
Y  \> 

in  the  evening 

in  their  behalf  x^^^ 
in  their  own  ^__^~-_--  ^~ 
in  their  own  names  ^    ^-^_xx_^^->, 

in  the  Fall 

»-v 

in  their  service           cx^Vo 

in  the  first       ' 

in  them 

in  the  first  instance 
in  the  first  place 

in  themselves  .  

fo 

in  this  ^_^ 

in  the  habit              ^° 

in  this  account 

in  the  interest 

in  this  action 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.        53 

in  this  business. 

in  your  life-. 

in  this  case              ^tj 

"-C_* 

in  this  claim 

in  your  lifetime 
in  your  mind                  U^s 

in  this  enterprise 

in  your  name 

in  this  instance                      xj 

in  your  opinion 

in  this  interview      ^~f 

X  y    O 

in  this  manner                    V— 

tr>    ., 
in  this  place 
^f 
in  this  relation  No 

in  your  own  ^_^ 
C 
in  your  own  name 

in  your  own  opinion 
in  your  presence             ^^ 

in  this  respect        *^ 

~*"~>^v_ 

inasmuch  as      (,       ^*  o 

in  this  suit  V~V 

inside  of  _>r£                        ^_ 

in  this  undertaking 

international  law  v  '*«—  ' 

in  this  way  ^^              '/[_^^^ 
in  this  world       i 

into  a  ^T3_ 
into  the 

in  those 

into  their  j^rl- 
U 

in  those  cases 
in  those  instances 
in  those  interviews         (j 

into  these    ^ 
into  this  (or  those)  -•  —  ^ 
into  this  country  ^—1  ^° 

in  those  respects        r^       Vx> 

is  a-n  **ir 

in  toto  ^-^| 
in  transitu  '  ^—-/| 
in  view 

is  as 
O" 
is  -done.. 

is  general-ly.      . 

in  which 

is  he  

in  which  he  

is  he  not  .      . 

in  which  way  ^_^ 
in  whichever         > 
in  you-r 

is  he  there  
is  his 

'O~ 

is  in 

in  your  answer                / 

is  it  

in  your  direct  examination    7-^3) 

is  it  any 

54            PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

is  it  as  

it  can  be_|..  _ 

1  v 

is  it  as  the.  .  .  . 

it  can  be  said     I 

is  it  his  ...  . 

it  cannot  1                   y" 

is  it  necessary    ,-r\^ 

it  cannot  be   [_ 

is  it  not         . 
is  it  payable 
is  it  possible.^. 
is  not-,,-  - 

it  cannot  be  said     | 
it  clearly  j      ^              \ 

it  has  been  j 

"N     , 
it  has  been  done  1 

is  that 

s 

it  has  been  found  JJ 

c 

*^j 

is  that  all  -  *>-  - 

i-,  that  true.p.  . 
1 

it  has  been  said    j 
it  has  not  1                 | 

isthe..^..     ' 

it  is  1 

is  there  -  >.-- 

it  is  a-n  1 

& 

Jb 

is  there  any  ..  .  _  . 

it  is  absolutely  necessary  1 
<Xrry/ 

is  there  any  other  -j^^-^ 

it  is  clear    ! 
«  —  ^ 

is  there  anything  -  ^f_^^_^ 

it  is  clearly  ! 

is  there  not-^- 

—  ~\s" 
it  is  generally  1 

is  there  nothing  -=-c_>- 
is  therefore----- 

it  is  generally  known    i 
it  is  important  1          ~£-? 

M^,. 

it  is  inconvenient  1       i 

is  this  »o.^- 

it  is  indeed  1 

is  to 
d 

it  is  just    ! 

is  to  be  

it  is  known  I 

it  a..j._ 

it  is  likely  L-<-  — 

it  appears  I 

it  is  nearly  i         / 

it  appears  that  I 
it  appears  to  hive*-     1 

it  appears  to  have  been  L  1 
\, 

it  is  necessarily  !     _>•' 
it  is  necessary  |    ^/ 
it  is  no  doubt  1 

it  can  ^                               r 

it  is  none  1 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        55 

it  is  not  !    . 

it  must  have  been  .  L^ 

it  is  not  intended  I 
«^  —  ^ 

it  must  necessarily  1^         / 

it  is  not  known  1 

it  must  not  be  L_^^^ 

it  is  now  1 

it  seems    i 

it  is  observed   1 

it  seems  so  t^ 

it  is  only    | 

it  seems  that  1 

it  is  possible  1 

it  seems  to  have  l^ 

it  is  quite  1 
CSL 

it  seems  to  have  been  J_^ 

it  is  quite  certain  1 

it  sometimes  L^.^           ^"S 

it  is  quite  clear  1 

it  therefore    1 

\i 

\ 
it  is  quite  likely^  /<  —  ^ 

it  was.p. 

it  is  said  L 

it  was  after-^-  - 

it  is  so    j 

it  was  afterward-P- 

it  is  that'  1 

it  was  done-L-  -          ^ 

it  is  the  1 
6 

it  was  entirely  O 

it  is  thr  i 

—  "f 
it  was  found  O 

it  is  therefore    i 

it  was  necessary  n 

it  is  true      -1" 

it  was  never  O 

1 
it  is  uncertain  1 

<!_P-  ' 

it  was  not  P 

it  is  unknown  1 
it  is  unnecessary  L        ,-./ 

it  was  nothing    O 

it  was  quite  clear  ^"'P 
f* 

it  is  well  known  1 

6 

it  was  said  D                         i 

it  is  your    1 

it  was  the      P 

it  is  yours  1 

it  looked  y      | 

it  was  understood  O 
it  was  unnecessary  n 

it  may  as  well  \s~ 
it  may  be  1^ 

it  was  you-r  PI 
it  will  f1       ' 

it  might  not  be  1^ 

it  will  be  r 

it  must  be  I 

it  will  be  certain  T 

56         PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

it  will  be  observed.  p.  . 
it  will  be  perceived  p      i> 

just  as  well  as./O-  - 

just  as  well  as  another  /6 
/               V  • 

it  will  be  said  P          *>*N^ 

just  before  A^ 

T 
it  will  be  seenP  ' 

it  will  not. 

just  now  F-  —  •! 
just  say  so  / 

it  will  not  be 

just  such  D  ' 

it  will  not  do 

just  taken  / 

it  will  not  have  ' 

just  the  / 

v^ 

it  won  t  i    . 

Justice  of  the  Peace  </ 

it  won't  be  1 
it  won't  do     ^ 

Justices  of  the  Peace  C^, 

K 

1 

it  would  |     I 

Kingdom  of  Christ  ...      - 

it  would  be  1 

Kingdom  of  God  .  -.^- 

it  would  do  1 
it  would  not'  i 

Kingdom  of  Heaven.  »Jti.. 
King's  Bench 

L 

it  would  not  be  1 

know  a  ^  —  ^              ^/ 

J^ 

know  better  v  —  ~v 

Jesus  Christ    / 

know  better  than  ^^^s^ 

judge's  notes.-/. 

know  it  v  -, 

1 

judicial  capacity-  -.-- 
judicial  decision   .    N^ 

know  nothing  -^^^t 
know  of  v^> 

judicial  investigation    . 

know  that  -  —  ^ 

just  about  this  time        of 
just  after  A. 

know  the  v^ 
know  thr  ^  ' 

just  answer  t-—1^ 

know  their  own  business  ^_^  —  A 

just  as  e 

know  them  v  t 

\ 

just  as  good  as  V* 

know  there  are  -^_./~N 

just  as  much  as  CO 

know  there  is  ^  P 

/ 
just  as  soon  as  Q_a 

know  there  is  not  ^^__-fi-' 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        57 

know  there  is  nothing  v^    _JZ  —  4 

learned  counsel  ^C~rf_ 

know  they  are   v,  s 

learned  friend  f^ 

know  they  are  not  \__^-  —  ' 

learned  gentleman    £f 

know  you-r  „  ^ 
know  your  own   —  ^- 
knows  a    ^  $ 

learned  judge  ^> 
left  hand  /^-^> 
legislative  action  f   /  ~> 

knows  that   x  o 
knows  them  >  —  t 

legislative  session    (J, 
less  than    r   (, 

knows  this  (or  those)  -  —  s 

let  us  .(?. 

knows  your  -  „ 

let  us  be  i"\ 

L 

let  us  be  satisfied   (*\p 

Labor  saving  I    V 

let  us  be  sure  <^*v       *~ 

laboring  classes  I    \^*  —  O 

let  us  bear  in  mind    ^^/^^ 

ladies  and  gentlemen    I  Ja 
/^~~J\^' 

let  us  consider  f°?\  .  . 

lager  beer  saloon  ' 

let  us  go  f° 

laid  down     (  \ 

let  us  have  (\^ 

larger  than  ^ 

let  us  look  f* 

last  night 

let  us  not  i""" 

last  past 

let  us  proceed  i^\o 

last  session   (J  at. 

let  us  say  f*\ 

r\ 

last  time  ' 

let  us  see  f°\ 

last  week          '  ^-i 
last  will  and  testament 
latter  part._  . 

let  us  try   (*\ 
letter  book  f       
letters  patent  ( 

latter  part  of 

lex  fori  I          ^. 

law  of  ' 

.  0       J 

lex  loci  ( 

law  of  nations 

lex  talionis    /^      f'       ° 

law  of  nature      "" 

life  estate  '     T 

lay  corporations  /           \3 

like  a  f~~ 

58         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

like  that 
like  the    ' 
like  them 
like  this  (or  those;  '         v> 
little  else..^r 

look  at  ./T7~| 
look  at  that    f  1 
look  at  them        ,.  -i 
look  at  this  (or  those)  v  s-  1 
look  like  (*•  « 

•little  less   / 

look  like  business  s*  y 

little  more    J[ 

look  like  his  signature  /"=  3 

little  more  than     f 

look  like  that  f*  r_ 

little  while    j      ' 

JT^S 

looks  like   ,  • 

little  while  after    /^    \  

looks  like  business  f                x_9 

little  while  ago  .f 
loan  a    f 
long  as  

looks  like  his  signature  f  —  » 

Lord  and  Sav'r,  Jesus  Christ  £\^ 

r°                   •— 

loss  of  money      /—  ^_^ 

long  after  ^~^V^_ 
long  ago 

lunatic  asylum    _        _pv 

long  "before          V, 

Major  General    l-y?. 

long  enough          ^x_ 

make  a  .-^ 

long  has  been  ^"^ 

make  it  appear  ^—  x_rv 

long  since  >~Ji—  9 

make  it  clear  ^~^~ 

long  time  ^~|^_  N 

make  that  ^—^     . 

long  time  after  ^~(^_ 

make  them  /•  —  -  —  -, 

long  time  ago  ^"U-^ 

\ 

make  this  (or  those)  -^^  —  7 

long  time  since  ^~U—  j>^_p 

V3 

makes  the  /—  >  —  a 

long  while 

makes  their  s~**jC> 

long  while  ago           

mala  fides  .srrJ-  V. 

long  while  after 

b 

manner  in  which  ^~*  —  *-^ 

longer  than   <i—? 

many  a  ^  —  -^—^  — 

longer  than  the  *"" 

many  a  man    ^~~-  —  sv  —  a 

longer  than  thr 

many  as  possible  ^^_^? 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.         59 

many  cases   ,  —  ~^s  — 

may  have  been  .^75. 

many  circumstances    /-  —  -  —  f 
O 
many  instances  -  —  —  ~  —  ( 

many  more  ^—^_^    s 
many  more  than  x  —  ^__>    => 

may  have  been  thr  ^3 
may  have  done  ^—5 
may  have  done  so       -^p> 
may  it  please  the  court  )  ,-* 

many  occasions   <-  —  -  —  s 
many  persons   ^  —  ^—-I\ 

may  it  please  your  Honor  ,-* 
may  likewise  ^  —  r~    °          /~/ 

many  such    x  —  ^j> 

may  never  ,  —  ~^~~\ 

many  things    ,  —  _^\__P 

may  nevertheless  ^  —  -^—^\^° 

marriage  settlement   '    '-/j» 

may  not    ^ 

mastering  a  ^^>/ 

may  not  be   --a 

mastering  the  ''r1 
matter  of  fact 

\ 

may  not  be  said   --a 

T 

may  not  liave  r* 

may  al»o  ,  —  f\ 

may  not  have  been  ^ 

may  as  well  /—C~ 

may  perhaps  '  —  NX 

may  as  well  have  been  ^—^ 

\o 
may  prevent   ^  —  sr\ 

may  be   '  —  x 

may  probably  ^—  NS 

may  be  able  to  x—  x 

may  be  aware  s  —  >. 

Vv 

may  seem  ^~f~^ 
may  serve    s~~ir 

may  be  certain  ^->.   ' 

may  sometimes  s~~tr~^~t> 

may  be  done    ^  —  x^ 

may  the  <~* 

may  be  greater  s  —  -v  J 

may  therefore   ^  v 

may  be  likely  s  —  s^    -  

may  we   *•  —  ^ 

may  be  rather  s  —  x       ~> 

may  you-r   ^  —  ^ 

may  be  said  ^  —  v^ 
may  be  sure  .,  —     ' 

may  yours   '-—> 
me  a  

;? 
may  be  very,  —  *^~^ 

me  another 

may  be  very  sure  ^=T 

me  there 

may  have  ^5 

mean  by  that  

60             PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

mean  to  .^. 

more  than  any  one  -<r^i_^>.-. 

mean  to  be 

more  than  any  one  eke  er~~±_^~*\ 

mean  to  say 

more  than  any  other  <r~x.      ^- 

medical  jurisprudence  **  —  -j 

more  than  any  other  person 

member  of  Congress  s  —  •<  —  ° 

more  than  anything  t-\^^_s 

member  of  Parliament  -'    ~*\f 

more  than  anything  else  <r-^_^^_^. 

member  of  the  Bar  /•    "<x 

more  than  ever   <r~s 

member  of  the  Legislature  ^>// 

more  than  once    «—  ^ 

members  of  Congress  s~~*  —  ° 

more  than  that    £—  p 

members  of  Parliament  s~~v\/' 

more  than  the  ^-3 

members  of  the  Bar  ^"~*v 

more  than  the  other  <^-j> 

members  of  the  Legislature  s—  6  / 

more  than  thr  ^  i  ^ 

Methodist  Church     7T£  . 

morning  after             ^^__ 

S      ^-> 

Meth.  Episcopal  Church        4> 

most  always  ^~k    a 

O                    /S 
might  have      ^_ 

most  happy  -'""JK 

might  have  a     >-, 

most  important  ,  —  v  —  N^ 

r~  •* 

might  have  done  it     \^_^ 

most  likely  »•—» 

might  not  ^ 

most  of  the  time  ^~\ 

might  not  be   ^"~\. 

Mr.  Chairman     "^    *~* 

miss  a-n 

Mr.  President          y 

mode  of  combination  ^>  \_D 

Mr.  Speaker  'C?\i___ 

'  1 

Monday  afternoon 

much  as     / 

months  after           vo 

much  as  possible,     o^ 

more  and  more  c~<~^ 

much  as  the     / 

more  or  less  ^—/^ 

much  as  thr      O 

more  probable  «^~^\ 

much  as  there  is  %  $ 

more  probable  than  c^fv. 

much  money     *—  —  ' 

more  than  ^  —  3                     (, 

much  of     C 

more  than  any  £~~^_s 

must  also  --—  I  J 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.            61 

must  always  .  s.  —  (     a 

my  dear  brother  ^~^|- 

must  be  •'~~&v 

must  be  able  to  <^^v 
must  be  made  (or  met)  ^"X 

my  dear  friends   '"" 
my  dear  madam  ^~ 
my  dear  mother  ""    vl__^ 

must  be  ready  '"~V     A 
must  be  thr  ^""X 
must  be  told  /-  —  b. 
must  become  <^~\ 
must  do  /-~& 
must  do  something   /•—& 

my  dear  sir   ^~^] 
£\ 

.         ,       o' 
my  dear  sister      J 

my  father        X 

my  fellow  citizens      Vn 

/•  —  >.                 o 

my  friend 
my  friends 

must  go  ^—Tf— 

my  mind 

must  have  /  —  & 

my  mother 

must  have  been  s    &. 

my  noble  friend    *~         \ 

must  have  known   ^~\ 

•   •        --  —  \ 
my  opinion  \  _ 

must  know  /•  —  j>^^ 

my  own 

must  make  /-  —  ir^>  

my  own  account 

must  not    ^  —  b^ 

my  own  interest 

must  say  '^~t>\ 
must  see  ^~t>\ 
must  take  -^~J> 

my  own  knowledge                   / 
my  own  opinion               \ 
my  own  relations 

;  must  tell  ^~e> 
my  belief      ^\- 

my  text 

N 

my  beloved  '     x> 
my  beloved  brethren  '    ^L 

Near  as  possible  -^-  -  , 

X3 

near  as  we  can 

s  —  V            \j 

my  beloved  friends        \ 

va 

near  as  you  can 

my  brethren  '    ^\ 

nearer  than       '2^ 

my  brother         \ 

necessary  charges   v_£>^ 

my  dear  ^~^\  - 

necessary  consequence    ^-~O^ 

my  dear  brethren  ^~ 
S 

need  not 

62         PHONOGRAPHIC 

:  PHRASE  BOOK. 

need  not  be  ^^-^ 

no  less  than  .-  (.  .(, 

need  not  say   ,^- 

no  more  •  —  e~x 

neither  a-n    ^^  ^^ 

no  more  money  ^—  *•    ^   "  —  " 

neither  the 

no  more  than   ^_£~~^ 

nervous  system         No) 

no  necessity  v_^TJ 

never  a        V., 

no  notice  ^^-^^^i 

never  be  v    V. 

no  occasion  ^^^  

never  do        V 

no  one  \__^-^ 

never  said  ~~    \^> 

^  —  l^ 
never  said  so     vj> 

no  one  else  x_^-v 

c 

no  one  there     ^_^^^ 

-—I     S 

never  shall       V    ) 

never  since   v     Vx^_p 

no  part  --_x\ 
no  part  of  v  -\ 

new  one  ^_^_ 

no  person   x^  —  'V 

New  Testament     _  _  J-^_ 

no,  sir    ^—  9 

New  York  ^f 

no  statement  ••  —  f^ 

New  York  City  .  JP 

no  such   ^* 

New  York  State  _j[ 
next  of  kin  x^_s>  —  D 

no  such  thing    -^y> 
no  wonder        x  ^»». 

next  thing  •  —  R_^ 
nine  or  ten 

non  resident  "~~ 
North  America 

nine  or  ten  thousand          /~ 
no  account  ^^  ^ 

North  Carolina  . 
north  »ide       J> 

no  better  -.  —  -x 

northeast  quarter  ^^"O 

no  better  than   •>  —  •>. 

Northern  States 

no  communication  N  —  /  *  —  '            •" 

northwest  quarter      <~-  -3 

no  connection  ^  —  '  —  ^ 

not  a  ^T_ 

no  doubt  ^  -| 

not  a  minute 

no  instance  s  ^_p 

not  a  moment 

d 

no  intention  v  —  ^^^5 

not  at  that  time    J 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        63 

not  enough  ^^T^_ 

o 

not  more  than 

Object  of  .  ?f  . 

not  necessarily      *~*r 

objected  to  \ 

not  necessary 

objection  overruled  \ 

not  new 

objection  sustained  Np 

not  now 

objections  overruled   \> 

not  once         J 

objections  sustained  ^p 

not  one         3 

of»S. 

not  only     >  —  ' 

of  all  ^~ 

not  only  that  """*•  —  X 

of  all  its 

not  so  much      J— 

of  all  others  vLo 

/ 

not  that     ' 

of  all  the 

not  the 

of  all  their  \^ 

not  to  my  knowledge  ^L-^_^ 

D 

of  all  their  own  V^ 
>  —  - 

nothing  about  it  "    \_^ 

of  an  ^* 

.,           1 
nothing  else         I, 

of  another  V»a 

nothing  less       y_i 

of  course 

nothing  more  than       \^~^ 

of  course  not 

-  —  i 
nothing  said        l^n 

of  course  there  is  v-£r^> 

1     -—* 

nothing  said  or  done       (  p   * 

of  his  being  there    \ 
I             —  ^ 

nothing  was  said          '  —  .» 

of  his  decease    pL 

1s—/ 
nothing  was  said  or  done  '      v  ^ 

V 

of  his  disease  T 

—  •>                      I/I 

now  and  then        (, 

i 

of  his  own  ^  —  ' 

now  then  ^"^ 

of  his  own  accord       —  f~ 

nowhere  else    ^~^o 

of  his  speech  ^\ 

number  of  \> 

of  it 

number  of  the  "X 

of  its 

number  of  their  _\  . 

Vo 

of  its  own  ^  — 

(  f 

number  of  you-r  Vu 

of  other  V_ 

64         PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

of  our   *\                              (d£&'syi0{£r  \ 

on  another  occasion    ~~ 

C**1" 

of  such  / 

on  any  other 

of  the  ^ 

on  any  other  occasion^^"^      ~^~ 

of  the  world  ^^ 
of  their  V  — 
of  their  own  \^_^_^ 

^  —  9 
on  as 

on  both  sides         ~j 
on  business  v     \        \, 

of  you-r         ' 
of  your  opinion     —  v 
of  your  own  S>- 
of  your  own  knowledge  S*- 
off  and  on  ^-*  —  '               * 

on  business  there  v     A 
on  each  v-—  f 

on  her        ^ 

on  her  account       ") 

^—  ^^~^ 
on  her  side             A 

officers  of  the  Navy  ^>/        V 

on  his 

official  dispatch  v 

C^xJ 

on  his  account 

often  a  ^-*                ^> 

on  his  behalf        N. 

Oh,  yes    ^ 
Oh,  yes,  sir     / 
Old  and  New  Testament  <^—  1 
old  gentleman    r 
old  lady  (** 
Old  Testament    fj» 
on  a  _ 

on  his  own 
on  his  own  account 
on  his  own  behalf  **"    ~^\ 
on  his  part       \ 
on  it 
on  its 
on  me 

on  account 

on  mine 

on  all  C-x 

on  more  ^~ 

on  all  occasions  ^—^ 

on  more  than  one  occasion      ~i_D 

on  all  sides        ^ 

on  my 

on  all  subjects        ^^ 

on  my  account  ^ 

on  all  such  ^/ 

on  my  own 

on  an 

on  my  own  account 

on  another 

on  my  own  part  *""  ~~     ^\ 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

65 

on  ray  part 

on  the  day  of  the  date  J7l__ 
on  the  ground 

on  no  other  V~^"~y'X 

on  no  other  occasion  ""    ^N~~fX 

on  the  left-hand  ~~~ 

on  one  occasion      ^j_D 

on  the  morning 

on  one  or  two  occasions         J 

„      Ha 

on  one  side           J 

<t—  -\ 

on  or  about 

—  *~~~*_ 
on  the  morning  after 

on  the  night 

^  —  "\ 

on  the  one  part         x. 

on  or  after        \ 
on  or  before       "\, 

on  or  by  ^~\ 

_  *-^t 
on  or  off         v_ 

on  our 
on  our  account 

on  the  one  side        ^ 
on  the  other  ^"/ 
on  the  other  hand     ^7 
on  the  other  part    ^~/ 
on  the  other  side    "^r 
on  the  other  side  of  f 

on  several   ^vL 

on  the  other  side  of  a  "*~1 

on  such     /^ 
on  that 
on  that  date  ~~    \ 
on  that  day         | 

on  the  other  side  of  the  U  *~i 
on  the  other  side  of  the  case  ^ 
on  the  other  side  of  their  ^~1 
on  the  part  of  v~\) 

*L 

on  that  diagram         i 

on  the  present  occasion  "\a^- 

^> 

on  that  ground       **-» 

on  the  relation  ^-*^' 

on  that  subject        \ 
on  the 
on  the  account 

on  the  right-hand       ^> 
on  the  side      | 
on  the  side  of     t 

on  the  bed   ~"^ 

on  the  side  of  a     U 

on  the  contrary      y 

on  the  side  of  the  ^- 

on  the  date  ^ 

on  the  side  of  the  bed     "x 

on  the  day      I 

on  the  side  of  the  case    •    ° 

on  the  day  of     (, 

—  A 

on  the  day  of  the 

on  the  side  of  their    T 

H> 
on  the  stand 

66         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

on  the  subject  7N  _ 

one  after  ^"^ 

on  the  subject  of    \, 

one  another  ^\       ^ 

on  their  ^  ^ 
on  their  account 
on  their  own  ^     ~'^~ 

one  day  ^N 
one  evening^ 
one  of  the  ^i 

on  their  own  account 
on  their  own  part                "*\ 

one  of  their   ^ 
one  or  both  ~N 

on  their  part            'x 

one  or  more  ^^_f~Nf 

on  them        ( 

one  or  other   ^     ^ 

on  themselves       (o 
on  these  "~^\ 
on  these  occasions  T~^l.  =^ 
on  this  ^rt 

one  or  the  other  ^  
one  or  two  ^_^i         ^ 
one  party  ~\A 
one  side  ^i 

on  this  account  ~—f 

one  side  of  ^ 

on  this  check  v  —  / 
on  this  occasion             ^    —j 

one  side  of  the  "^ 
one  side  of  the  case    |i  D 

on  this  point       1 

one  side  of  their      ~~^ 

on  those  -  .  to- 
on those  checks     Jo 

one  side  or  the  other  """i  . 
one  thing  ~~\_^                    V 

on  what  ^7^1  _ 

one  thing  more  ^X>  —  ^ 

on  which  .77. 

one  thing  or  another  ^_^^ 

on  your 

only  a     - 

on  your  direct  examination  ^~7 

only  an  <^_y 

on  your  own      C 

only  be  ^-A 

on  your  own  account     O-  —  -^ 

only  ground  ^^ 

on  your  own  part    ~^~ 

only  had    ^-^t 

once  in  a  great  while        «_^  1 

only  one  C_  -^ 

once  in  a  while  ~\JT\ 
once  or  twice  ^^x 

r 

only  one  day  •;  --v 
only  one  time  C^"\ 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        67 

only  so  far  .O^-v 

or  the  . 

only  such  CL/?  v__ 

or  we      5 

only  upon  c^--\ 

or  we  be 

0 

->s 

open  a-n  )i 

or  we  shall     \ 

open  the  i 

or  you    •> 

open  their  \   . 

or  you  must  have      "^"f^^ 

o 
opportunity  of  \ 

order  a   _  \-_ 

or  a  _5  _ 

order  the        u 

or  an 

ordinary  circumstances    ^f 

or  another    .  -  o_ 

other  than  ^ 

or  as      * 

other  than  that  \ 

or  as  it  (or  the) 

ought  a  ' 

or  as  it  is 

ought  an  J 

•  >r  as  their    « 

ought  not 

or  have    ^ 

ought  to 

or  have  been  ^ 

ought  to  be  *v 

or  is  it  or  they     v 
or  is  thr    w 
or  not  ^ 

ought  to  be  able  to  S. 
ought  to  be  done  x. 
ought  to  have  _L_  . 

or  of 
—  ^-- 

ought  to  have  a-n  U 

or  other  __i_ 

ought  to  have  been     Lv 

or  otherwise      L_ 

ought  to  have  been  thr      LN. 

or  our 

ought  to  have  done  L 

or  rather 

1  J 
ought  to  have  had  li 

or  some 

ought  to  make 

or  some  other 

ought  we  ' 

or  some  such      ^~J 

n 

ought  you 

or  something  like  that    '"^  — 

our  own  

J"^^*! 

or  something  to  that  effect       j 

our  own  business         v__p 

68         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

out  a  . 

P 

i 

out  of 
out  of  business  N^^^ 
out  of  nature  ^-  

Paper  money  V 

pan  passu  _Y_  \ 

\         t 

part  of 

out  of  the  _L_  _ 

part  of  a 

out  of  the  country 

part  of  the 

out  of  the  way  ^ 

i 

_ 

out  of  their,  t.  . 

out  of  their  own  L  -• 

party  of  the  second  part  *X 

out  of  town  1 
out  of  your  w 
out  of  your  own  f 

pass  a  >° 
passage  money  y° 
peculiar  circumstances  \    - 

over  a  ^~* 

peculiar  circumst's  of  the  case\ 

over  all  N- 

over  all  other  />• 

t      ( 

over  an  ^ 

penal  actions    \    ^ 
per  annum  \^~* 
per  cent.  \/~' 

t 

over  and  above  ^X 

over  and  over    \  

per  minute    V-~? 
<\ 

perhaps  not  _\j_^_ 

over  it  .  _  . 

perhaps  they     V 

\c 

over  its 

perhaps  we       \ 

over  the 
over  the  other  -  y_ 
over  their  \  

\ 
perhaps  you-r     \> 

personal  actions  -  c^-  —  - 
personal  estate  (Vp 

over  them    j 
over  this  y 

personal  expenses  <Vp 

<\o 

personal  interview   QL--^^__^v. 

owing  a  j 

personal  knowledge   ^yv_,/ 

owing  the    / 

personal  property  Q>A 

own  a  ^7^\ 

personally  about  that  Q^^, 

own,  use    Jb. 

personally  acquainted  Q^- 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        69 

place  after  that  _\>.  . 

prove  a  !\^,  _  . 

place  of  business  Ni*"' 

public  house  \  .  . 

X  S~  V 

plaintiff's  counsel  V-r» 

\^ 

public  matters  \ 

point  of  fact    v. 

public  service    >v 

point  of  it  (or  the)  V. 

\\e 

public  works     \. 

point  of  view   \__ 

Q^_o 

police  court  \/"e~ 
political  economy.  .  _ 

Quarter  day       ? 
quarter  section 

positive  about     y 

K\ 

positive  about  that     f 
positive  about  this     J 
post  mortem  V~V^[^-N  t> 

question  of  fact  C  — 
question  of  law  C  
quit  claim  
quite  agree 

post  office  No 
post  road     V'' 

quite  as  likely 
quite  as  much        / 

postage  stamp  \o 

quite  certain 

.  postal  card  \>/*~ 

quite  likely 

power  of  attorney  ^^  (^  _, 

quite  probable       r\ 

Presbyterian  Church      >o 

/  (\ 

£_                                                               \ 

quite  sure  J) 

/  \ 
present  circumstances      \j> 

quite  sure  there  (or  they  are)      ) 

.    \            o 

present  time     «-i 

~s 

quo  animo  C  —  ^_^,  —  ^ 

President  of  the  U.  S.    Jp 

s\3 
(3 

previous  question  \ 

quo  warranto  C  —  e->^ 

R     ' 

Sf__ 
previous  to  that     "\ 

Railroad  car    is 
^1 

\      /»^f 
price  current    a  —       I 

railroad  carriage  ts     *~~7 

prima  facie  -VT"l       ) 

railroad  station  cs^  p 

primary  evidence  ^^~~^ 

s~\.      ^ 

railway  car   tS    l  

pro  rata    N/| 

railway  carriage   t/    \—j 

c\ 
pro  tanto            \ 

j\      /- 

promissory  note  j      ^^* 

railway  station  </      ai 

A                  U 

raise  a   S 

70            PHONOGRAPH4,C;,pJiRASE   BOOK. 

raise  up  .  /T\ 

O 

raises  up  S\ 
ran  a  .  .  . 

resulting  use  /?  .  .  -b 
retaining  fee  ''i^i 
retired  list    V"3 

ran  away         ' 

revenue  bill   //V^^. 

rather  better         \ 

°X2 

rather  better  than         X                 
rather  than 

review  their  /A 
right  or  wrong 
rise  again 

read  the  second  time   /  ^r> 

Roman  Catholic   /      ( 

u  —  -. 



read  the  third  time  /  (J 

Roman  Catholic  Church   /      (^ 

^-=>       L- 

real  action  -^/f- 

round  about      * 

real  estate  ^ 

run  a    / 

real  estate  broker  ,^/£. 

run  away  Si 

real  property  /*\ 
received  your  letter    jisJ 

run  away  from  thr  /  ^V*     N 
running  away    /        ^ 

recent  session.  -/^-s- 

s 

re-cross  examination    } 
re-direct  examination    /fy~^H2 
refer  the   ^ 
refer  their  *^ 

Sabbath  day     7 

l*s 

Sabbath  school  1     7 

P     •— 
said  and  done   J 

J          P 
said  and  done  there  J 

referring  a   s' 

P 
said  he  L~*^ 

91 
referring  the  / 

said  I    I 

remain  thr     V  i> 

said  or  done  l/J 

remembering  a    \  —  xx 

remembering  the    \  —  s( 

said  or  done  there  v  \ 
said  there  j 

res  gestae.  .^f 

Saint  Paul   <ov 

res  inter  alios  acta.y^_^    *  —  i 

Saint  Peter  «-'-x 

res  judicata  .  .  WL_, 

same  as  6   6 

•       (  1 

residuary  legatee  /A/ 
resulting  trust  S^ 

same  side   <5~4 
sanction  their 

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.            71 

satisfactory  proof 

Saturday  afternoon 

Secretary  of  the  Navy  cr-x  —  <\ 

savings  bank  C-^o 
Saviour  of  the  world        ^_^ 

Secretary  of  the  Treasury  cH] 
Secretary  of  War  cr-'N 

saw  a  . 

see  a  \ 

saw  another.  J.  . 

see  the     . 

saw  he  (or  him) 
saw  him  there           ^ 

see  thr  A.  . 
seems  likely.  -^/^  — 

say  a  )- 

say  anything  about  it     ) 
^—  -  ^^^v 

seems  so    __ 

(30\ 

seems  thr 

say  anything  about  that)matter  1 

seems  to  be     ^—^ 

say  anything  that  we  )__.^  lx-~> 

seems  to  have 

say  anything  that  you  <^-. 
say  how  many  \—  ^—  -^_^ 

I 
seems  to  have  been   ^—^ 

**+. 

seems  to  me       N 

say  how  much  i-^,-y 

Senate  and  House  «^^-j> 

say  so 

Senate  &  House  of  Rep's  <t~^-ts'  \o 

say  thr 

Senate  of  the  U.  S.   <y 

says  a  j 

6 

Senate  resolution  a^-v.xp 

says  he  d  — 

.  set  forth  [r\ 

says  he  was  )~^. 
says  I    /• 

V 

set  of  books  L 
several  others  C 

says  she  d 
•  scatter  their 

several  thousand   *L 
several  thousand  dollars  ^ 

school  days 
sea  captain  ") 

several  times  V 

)          ^~» 
shall  a./ 

season  of  the  year 

shall  all   -" 

second  time  a-,            ' 
secondary  evidence  <*-,/^-^J> 

shall  another  *£. 
shall  be  •<. 

*        ^ 

^ 

Secretary  of  Legation  a-> 

shall  become  ^ 

72         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

shall  do  f^_ 

shall  endeavor  <—-1 

i 

she  was  -)•  • 
she  was  not    ) 

shall  entertain  <•  -1 

she  was  there     ) 

; 

shall  expect  gfc-f 

she  would     )    J 

) 
shall  go  -^— 

shall  have  ^ 

S 
ship's  husband      ) 

short  and  clear  t  —  -J*4 

shall  have  been  ^ 

short  distance  [ 

shall  have  been  thr       \^ 

*J 
short  session^  c 

shall  have  the  (or  to)  ^_ 

short  time  j 

shall  make  >^>  

9 
shorter  lhm.S 

shall  manage   -^  —  -J 
j        * 

shortly  after        \  

shall  never  "^-l 

should  a     ).. 

shall  not  .^  . 

should  all  .  0.  . 

shall  not  be  *-v 
^  \ 

should  another.    /.  . 

shall  take  place  r 

•/ 

should  be 

shall  the.  J_ 
shall  thr  „/ 

should  be  very     ) 
should  do     ) 

shall  there  be  v' 

should  endeavor  ) 

shall  therefore  *^/ 
)       ^~ 

should  go    ) 

shallwe  r 

should  have      ) 

shall  we  be    <^ 

should  have  been      1 

shall  we  do  jf^ 

should  have  been  thr  ) 

1  ; 

shall  we  say    5j 
)    ) 

should  never    )            ^* 

'    J 
shall  we  see     •(? 

should  never  have  been    ) 

)m 
she  has     ) 

should  not  -  ... 

she  has  been     ) 

"S 

should  not  be     ) 

she  has  done  JJ 

should  not  have  been     ,; 

she  is    ) 

should  say   ) 

she  told  me    )      &t     )    

r*S                                  nS              X 
V  \                           1 

should  the  . 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        73 

should  thr   ..).. 

since  I  have  been  the  .  

should  there  be    ) 

since  I  have  been  thr 

«ut 

should  we    ) 

since  I  have  seen                    » 

should  we  be     ) 

since  I  was 

should  we  do   ) 

since  that          / 

should  we  say  *'  J 
should  we  see    ') 
show  a  </           '. 

since  that  time  „ 
since  the 
since  the  other    ^~f 

show  another.y/ 

since  thr  (or  they  are)  ^~ 

shown  you    -^ 

since  then   ^^ 

shows  a  <\J 

since  there  is  ^^.^ 

side  by  side  U^o 
f 

since  they 

side  of  l 

since  they  have 

f 

side  of  a  ^ 

since  this 

side  of  the 

since  you-r 

0-, 

p 
side  of  the  bed  ^ 

N  —  * 

since  you  have 

side  of  the  way  ^v 

since  you  have  been 

f 
side  of  their.L.. 

• 

six  or  eight  .Q.  _/\ 

sight  of  *• 

six  or  seven  „      A 

a  —  ^  No 

sign  a  

six  years 

sign  the 

slower  than      6      J 

sign  thr 

so  a  > 

silver  currency  /-r 
since  a 

so  as  J 
so  as  to  } 

Of 

since  his 

so  as  to  be  JL 

since  his  death       ,-, 
since  1                   f 

so  do  ) 
so  far    J 

since  1  have 

so  far  as    J 

since  I  have  been    0    , 

so  far  as  aj 

74             PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

so  far  as  I    J.  . 

so  they  are_L  . 

so  far  as  I  am  J^ 

so  to  speak  ,i 

so  far  as  I  can  J^ 

\ 
so  very  much  J 

^~O 

so  far  as  they  <•/ 
so  far  as  to  say     J 

so  we   I 
so  we  hear  ) 

T" 

so  far  as  you-r  J      \ 
V^,    ) 

so  were  j/ 

so  far  as  you  know  J 
v~»^^' 

some  how    cr^v^v 

so  far  as  you  remember   J 

x_«/^ 

some  how  or  other  g-^.  —  ^^^ 

so  far  as  you  were  (or  recollect)  J        , 

some  kind   0  —  \ 

so  he  told  me  J— 

some  kind  or  other  „  —  ^__^ 

so  it  seems  J-  —  & 

some  little  a~~f 

so  long  ^ 

some  means    i  —  v^s 

so  long  ago  ^_^^^_ 

some  one  a  —  i 

so  long  as  ^^ 

some  one  else  g-~s> 

so  must  )^-^ 

some  one  or  other    <r^^i-~^^ 

so  on    ^ 

some  other    f-  ~\ 

so  that  ) 

some  other  person    0  ~^\ 

so  the  ) 

some  person      ^~^\ 

so  then  ) 

some  reason  e—v"^ 

\\i 
so  thr.J. 

some  reason  or  other  a~^'~'  ^V 

so  there  are   | 

some  things  «^%_* 

so  there  be  )    > 

some  years    a~~> 

so  there  can  be    j 

some  years  ago    <T~~> 

so  there  has  or  is      x  N 

\ 
so  there  has  been     J 

so  there  has  (or  is)  not    j 

some  years  before  <r~> 
some  years  past  <r~> 
something  before  /r-^_^ 

so  there  may 

something  else  <r~*^^/ 

so  there  must 

something  has  been    r^»  —  ^ 

so  there  were  j 

something  like  that  a  —  ^~*J 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        75 

S 

something  more  _  jTV^TT^ 

special  session    J^>._ 

something  more  than    a~~*<^>    3 

specie  payment  ^  yv 

something  or  other  a  —  -x_x\ 

spirit  land  -0-,, 

something  to  that  effect  <j-^_-i 
something  was  said  „  —  ,  x\     \  
sometime  after  ir^-^      \ 

spirit  world 

o  'y 

spoke  of    \j 
spoke  of  a  \f 

sometime  afterwards   «-^~> 

spoke  of  the  *M 

sometime  or  other  a-^  —  s_ 
sometime  previous  o-v—  xx 

x~p 

sometimes  it  is  o-v-^s 
sometimes  there  is   a^t^i 

spoke  of  their  A.  - 
9          >» 

spoken  of    \ 

stand  still  j 

f          f 

standing  order  ^^~\ 

D                   1 

somewhere  about  tf~>/ 

T^                1 

standing  room  ^*    \ 

somewhere  along  a  —  •v/C  —  s 

standing  there  ^^-~s- 

somewhere  along  there  a  —  ^^     

state  liovv  many  [•—  +^-^_^ 

somewheres  about  0—>S 
somewheres  along  there  a—  ~~^\^_^ 

state  how  much  1-  —  v  —  y 

0               / 

state  of  affairs  [, 

soon  after  -3^.- 

state  of  facts  u^ 

soon  after  that 

State  of  New  York  U_^ 

soon  thr 

state  of  the  I 

soon  thereafter 

.state  of  the  case  t  —  o 

south  aide  -f  . 

Ji 

southeast  quarter  <—^> 

yO 

Southern  States  L 

t  C 

southwest  quarter   c* 

1 

state  of  tLeir    1  .  . 
I,      I 
state  -whether   L^ 

Statute  of  Frauds  *»   ' 

still  another    s^~ 
0 

speak  of  ?  _  . 

still  more    /*    N 

0 

speak  of  a  ^. 

stock  book    _  J\  

speak  of  the  -^  - 

stock  broker          \  

speak  of  their  -%_ 

struck  jury      1  

subject  matter  \^-  ^ 

76         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

/>       /> 

such  a  _<_  _  ^_.t_ 

such  will  J_2 

such  an  J 

such  will  not  £ 

such  another    j 

such  will  not  be  ft 

such  are  / 

such  would  be  j 

such  are  not  9 

sum  and  substance  a  —  ^"v, 

such  as  £ 

summing  up      ^—  ^^^^ 

such  as  are  o*C 
such  as  are  not  <£> 

Sunday  afternoon 
Sunday  school        ^  

such  as  that  L 
such  as  the    § 

suppose  they  were  \>   , 

0    V// 

suppose  you  were  V/ 

such  as  thr  (or  they  are)  U 

r, 

sure  way     J 

such  as  this  (or  those)  £ 

surrounding  circumstances 
<r-x                              ^ 

such  as  we   or  would)  ,^ 

swearing  to      ^^\ 

such  as  we  V  would   have  oC 

T   ' 

such  as  were  cr 

Take  care    1     -  — 

such  as  you-r  J> 

take  care  of    I     -  —  = 

such  as  you  have^^ 

take  charge  1  —  -, 

P 
.  such  cases  /O 

take  into  1  ... 

such  has  or  is   6 

1 
take  occasion  1         ~~> 

sucli  has  been  CN. 

take  pains  1  

such  has  not  been  4» 

1         ^> 
take  part  1  <\ 

i 

such  have  6 

take  place  i  

such  matters  /--  ^ 

1° 
take  possession  1  

i               ^P 

/> 
such  may  be  *  —  v 

take  such  1    f> 

such  may  have  £—* 

take  that  1  . 

such  means  /-* 

take  them  1  —  , 

1 

such  things  as  that  f^ 

take  this  1  

such  was  r 

take  this  occasion  1  —  , 
1                  ^>-:) 

such  were  f^ 

take  you-r  1  „ 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        77 

take  your  opinion..!  —  ^  . 
take  your  own  L-, 

ten  thousand  dollars.  J.  . 
terra  firma  I/V,,^         I 

.* 

/             ^>  —  N 

take  your  view  1  . 

than  ar.  . 

x_ 

taken  aback  (or  back)  1  

than  it  A  _ 

S\  
' 

-  than  it  would  ^ 

taken  down  1  _, 

than  otherwise  _vr>. 

.  taken  place  1  —  ^ 

than  that    » 

1         ^^ 
taken  up  1  —  ~ 

than  the  * 

\, 
takes  occasion    1  —  °—  -^ 

than  the  other  Y 

talk  about  .TTA 

/        I 
than  thr.l. 

talking  about  *•  —  ^^N 

than  there  are  W 

talks  about  '  —  ^ 

than  there  was  L 

tell  her  L 

than  there  were   IT 

tell  him  U-N 

( 

than  this  (or  those)  \, 

t 

tell  how  U~\ 

thank  a  ' 

tell  how  long  L-^^--- 

thank  the  _  .  . 

tell  how  many  \*~^~^_/ 

thank  you-r 

tell  how  much  U—  vx-> 

that  a  _> 

f1                 f 

c 

tell  me  U-«j    or    \   —-^- 

that  all  v 

tell  that  I 

that  all  they  > 

( 

tell  the  P 

that  an  (or  and)  v 

tell  them  j 
f   ' 

that  and  other  (or  another).  I  .. 
f 

tell  us  L 

that  are  v 

)   f 
tell  you-r  L 

that  date   ) 

tell  you  many  lv~v^x 

that  day      \ 

f 

tell  you  much  ^-~j 

(  1 

that  does  | 

tell  you  where  L/ 

that  had  \    <r>s 

tell  your  ownJ 
ten  thousand  J 

1       ( 

that  had  been  ] 

that  had  not  been    ;i 

78         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

c 

^ 

that  has.    . 

that  is  the  {or  to)  

that  has  been  ^~> 

that  is  thr 

that  has  ever  been  \_-, 

that  is  to  be  ^x 

that  has  not  *•" 
/ 

that  is  to  say  ^ 

that  have 

that  it  A  . 

6 

that  have  been 

4 

that  it  has 

that  have  known  (or  none) 

that  it  has  not 

that  have  not 

that  it  has  nothing    —  f 

/  , 

4                ^-" 

that  have  now 

that  it  is 

that  he  ^ 

that  it  is  all  ( 

that  he  has  (or  is)  ^"~*> 

C  o/ 

that  it  is  necessary  Vfcr 

that  he  received  ^~*/ 

that  it  is  now  ^—  ^ 

that  he  was  ^~) 

that  it  is  thus  f 

that  I   > 

V) 

that  its 

that  I  am  ^—  - 
/ 

that  may  toe  ^""\ 
/            ' 

that  I  have  '• 

.,       (f 

that  said  so  T 

that  I  was  <. 

that  such/     ' 
'( 

that  I  was  not  J 

that  that  \ 

that  is  * 
( 

that  that  you  have  \ 
(              G 

that  is  a  ^ 

that  the 

that  is  about  >. 

that  then  ? 

that  is  about  all  X 
f            ( 
that  is  about  all  there  is  ^> 

that  is  all  f° 

i 

that  thr  .V  .  . 

that  there  had  V 

/I 

that  there  has  ^ 

that  is  not  *•* 
that  is  not  so  ^A 
that  is  only  ^-^ 

that  there  has  been  (o 

P 

that  there  has  neverv^ 

that  there  is  V 

r  _^ 

that  is  quite  certain  '—  *" 

that  there  is  not  ^ 

that  is  said  V 

that  there  is  nothing  \>s 

\-S 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.           79 

that  therefore  -V-  - 

that  you  may   .  rT^ 

that  they  > 

that  you  mean  ^"^ 

that  they  are  \__ 

that  you  must  v"'"Ti 

that  they  had        / 

that  they  have  '   > 

( 
that  they  were  /  / 

( 

that  you  said  f 

f  ( 

that  you  told  y* 

f    L/ 

that  you  were 

that  this   / 
( 

the  other  -  /-  - 

that  this  interview  > 
Lv^_^v 

the  other  day     / 

, 

the  other  side  |    / 

that  time  1 

( 

that  was  \ 

the  other  side  of  the'  case  / 

the  others    / 
£v 

that  was  all      ^) 

that  was  not  \ 
( 

them  a.^_- 

that  was  said    \ 

them  all  ( 

that  we  ' 
/ 

them  thr.L. 

that  we  do  not   5 

then  a  U 

that  we  shall  be  able  to   \ 
that  we  use    \                   ^ 

then  after  t 

then  again  C—  = 

that  were  ^^ 

then  be  U>^ 

that  were  not 

then  it  -C_  . 

(/) 

that  were  there  ^ 

then  it  was  L 

that  which  / 
/ 

then  it  would  (r\ 

that  which  is   ) 

then  the  4 

( 

that  which  must  be   / 
CA-B. 

then  thr-/-- 

°\ 

»u«t».»                                        N 

that  will  be  sL 

then  there  are     / 
then  there  was  ( 

that  you-r  * 

then  there  was  not   / 

that  yon  can 

/  s 

then  there  were/        -6- 

that  you  have  x> 

t      * 

then  you-r  L 

80            PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE   BOOK. 

then  you  sayAt*  -  - 

there  was  ».(._ 
I       C 

there  areA-^  . 

there  was  never     \ 

there  had  C    •*•  t 

there  was  no  one  f     ^~ 

1        f 

there  had  been  V 

Cv. 

there  was  not  (        ~^*\ 

t 

» 

there  was  nothing       \ 

there  has  been  \. 

Lf       f 
there  was  nothing  else  v^^  \ 

there  has  never  (a_-< 

t  /                     W 

there  were  v/                        \. 

there  has  not  (L 

there  were  not  C" 

there  is  C 

there  were  there  C/' 

there  is  a-n  (= 

there  will  (/ 

there  is  another  C  x 

there  will  be  (f\ 

there  is  no  Q_x 

there  would  \ 

there  is  no  such  t^ 

there  you-r  v. 

there  is  not   (a> 

these  are-.l. 

there  is  nothing  (j_^ 

these  circumstances  ^ 

f  '  ^^ 

there  is  only  one  (V>y->. 

these  will    () 

there  it  C 

these  will  be    Q 

there  it  is  'or  its)  £ 

they  are  A  .  _ 

there  may  be  v—  ^ 

they  are  able  to  t 

there  may  have  been  C-£> 

they  are  believed  (^ 

there  may  not  C^ 

they  are  not  C 

there  may  not  have  been  C, 

they  are  said   C 

there  must  be  v~->». 

they  are  there    C 

there  must  have  been  \s~\ 

they  are  used  f 

there  that  C 

they  did  (. 

there  the  C 

they  did  not  A.  ... 

there  they  \ 

they  do  ( 

there  they  were  ( 

they  do  not  \ 
/ 

there  was  C 

they  had  V.    iM/  ( 

PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.            81 

they  had  not  ( 

think  a-(  - 

they  have    (j 

think  another-/-- 

they  have  another  (/•  x 

V 
think  it. 

they  have  been    0 

think  it  is 

they  have  been  there    0*v. 

think  it  probable 

they  have  done  u 

think  of    f                ^^* 

they  have  had  u 

think  that    ( 

they  have  never  (j  —  \^_ 

V 

think  the.  ...  . 

they  have  no    C/  — 

think  thr../.  . 

they  have  no  other  v^-j—  ' 

think  there  is../-  . 

they  have  not    (j- 

think  there  is  a  / 

they  have  nothing  w"~T 

think  there  is  no'  / 

they  have  spoken  C^-^ 

think  there  is  not    /"* 
| 

they  have  their  / 

think  there  is  nothing  / 

they  may  \^-^ 

(^.     * 
think  they    ..  /  .               ^ 

they  may  be  t^^v 

think  they  areS/.  . 

they  may  have    C—^ 

thinks  a    / 

they  may  not  C^ 

thinks  the   . 

they  might  not  C-^ 

thinks  thr    z 

they  must  V-* 

this  accident./  . 

they  must  know  C-T>^_^- 
/ 

this  advantage   / 
/* 

they  must  never  V^--^_-i 

this  afternoon    / 

V 

they  must  not   V^->_^ 

they  said    «p 
'/ 

this  business  / 
this  can  be   / 

\ 

they  think    ( 

this  cannot  be  / 

they  were  (J/ 

this  case  / 

they  were  not  v" 

this  circumstance    / 

, 

r 

they  were  there  \/^ 

this  date  ( 

they  would   \ 

this  day  / 

82             PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

this  defence-  ./_ 
this  difference         f 

Thursday  afternoon  C. 
thus  far  C 

this  evening  / 

thus  it  is  4. 

—  / 

this  has   /^ 

thus  there  is   l) 

this  has  been  / 

time  and  again 

this  instance  / 

to  a  .  [  .  . 

k_p 

t 

this  is   / 

to  a  certain  extent    1  

this  kind    I 

to  all    p 

this  matter  ^— 

to  an     | 
J 

this  note    ( 

to  another   .  1  . 

this  speech     (* 

to  be  J 

this  subject  / 

to  become  . 

this  then  ( 

to  dictate. 

this  thing   / 

to  do      .  . 

this  time  f 

to  have     I.. 

this  was  U 

to  have  a  .  1 

this  was  not  / 
.    \ 

to  have  been    ' 

those  are  V^ 

to  have  done   1 

those  circumstances    fc 

/   /       0 
those  were   (o/ 

to  have  had  | 
to  have  known  (or  none)  1 

though  that  A  .  . 

to  have  the  ... 
I 

though  the  .(  .  . 

to  have  their.  L  . 

though  thr  (or  they  are)./  . 

to  his   1 

-L- 

though  they  ( 

to  his  death  P 

three  or  four..  C/{^ 

to  his  knowledge  1 

V 

through  a  .  P  . 

to  his  own    1 

through  it     f     3^, 

to  his  own  knowledge  i 

through  the 

^^~/ 

to  infer    ... 

through  thr  t.  . 

to  it..  ..               ' 

V 

1 

PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.           83 

to  leave 

to  your  own 

TV 

C 

to  make 

to  your  place  

to  my  recollection  .  I  .     ^ 

told  him  t  —  s^0 

to  other       . 

told  me  C->     ot,    f  

C 

to  others 

to-morrow  afternoon  .  ^J  ^-^_? 

C 

to  our    I      n 

to-morrow  evening  t~^/v*    ' 

/ 

to  ourselves  ..1     ^t,    ._. 

to  prevent. 
\>-' 

to-morrow  morning   '~ 

\f- 
to-morrow  night 

to  receive 

too  deep. 

/C 

to  remain  there.      . 

too  far  .  .^ 

to  reply    -*- 

too  much 

to  say- 

took  charge  .  j^ 

to  say  anything  -  .- 

took  charge  of  their  1 

to  see  .                  <^-" 

took  me    I                  6 
1  —  ^^ 

to  such  .  .  . 

took  part    1 

to  take  -  .-  . 

took  place   1 

L_ 

^so 

to  the  ... 

took  possession       i 

to  the  present  date        . 

took  their  |  ^° 

to  the  present  time 
^-1 

took  them   |  

to  the  time    ,                    t  —  v 

t  v 

took  you-r  I 

to  the  world 

total  amount      1 

to  their  .1 

towards  eaf  h  1 

to  theirs  -  .(_ 

V 

towards  it  \ 

to  them    . 

towards  them  1 

to  think  .  .  . 

towards  which  1, 

to  what  

towards  you  r    ,1 

'  r\ 

to  write 

treasure  trove     L 

tf 

/ 

to  you-r  _  . 

true  bill  .1.  _     L 

to  your  house  -  »  - 

true  God  ] 

84         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

true  or  not  .  .I/T^ 

under  the  circum'a  of  the  case 

Tuesday  afternoon     i 
twice  as  much  ~i~/   ^  7 
two  or  more   \f~~^ 

under  them    x  ^ 
under  these   ^_--v 
under  this  (>»  those)  •>  -t 

two  or  three.  .1 

n 

under  what    x  ^ 

two  or  three  days  .  .1 

two  or  three  o'clock  \.'. 

l 
<\      * 

1 
under  what  circumstances   v  s\ 

under  you-r    x^_  ^^                   Q 

under  your  own   x  ^ 

1 

United  States   k 

two  or  three  times-  -J- 
two  or  three  years    U-z,--'}- 

u       ^ 

United  States  of  America  Q~^/ 

Uncalled  for          x_ 

United  States  Senate  & 

under  a    ^  ^ 

United  States  Senator  Q^_  , 

under  all  the  circumstances  c_j> 
under  all  the  circum's  of  the  case  c> 
under  certain  circumstances  ^._^>~~f 

unless  it  (or  the)   d<7 
unless  it  is    ^# 
unless  there  (or  they  are)  x^3 

under  circumstances  ^~—f 
under  his  own   ^_~JL~S 
under  his  own  signature 

unless  there  is   <^y 
unless  they  <^_* 
unless  they  were   ^—f/ 

under  it  -.  ^ 
under  said  act   x  e 
under  side  '  £ 

under  side  of  the    v  1 
\ 

unless  this   C-^ 
unless  this  is    xL/ 
unless  this  is  done   CL# 

P 

unless  this  was  Q_^    J 

under  such    x^_>> 

unless  you-r  d_*  / 

under  such  circumstances   x.  _   * 

3  ~ 

under  such  regulation*  x,      ^^     J 

unless  you  were  C^ir 

until  it  (or  the) 

% 

under  such  rules   v  s  n 
under  that    x  ^ 
under  the    v  ^ 

until  thr 
until  there  is    ^ 

under  the  circumstances    x,  O 

up  and  down      j> 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        85 

up  there  _  o_ 

very  great  _>S*T- 

up  to  that  time  \ 
upon  a-n  ...         <^~^ 

very  great  extent  v*y 
very  lately  \J- 

upon  another     ."TT'' 

very  likely  \~f^~ 

upon  his    ^" 

very  little  ^/ 

upon  his  own       — 

very  much  V^^ 

upon  his  own  behalf      —  "\ 

e 
very  probable    v>Jx>v 

upon  it 

f          ^ 

very  seldom  V. 

upon  such    r 

very  short  \~y 

upon  that       ( 

very  short  distance  ^, 

upon  that  day      r 

very  short  lime  \~   J3 

upon  the  

very  shortly    ^_ 

upon  the  part  of  \, 

very  shortly  after  ^-^V 

upon  the  subject    \ 

very  soon  Vj^y 

very  soon  after  ^^_>v 

upon  their  own     \__^ 

very  soon  thereafter  ^^_^\ 

upon  them  .  r  . 

very  sure  V. 

upon  themselves    r_ 

very  well     VJ 

upon  this  (or  those)     Q 

very  well,  sir  \*J      1 

upon  which    r 

Vice  President  ^^o 

usually  a  .).  . 

Vice  President  of  the  U.  S.^-y, 

<* 

V 

r\ 

vice  versa    \_/) 
i                   i 

Valuable  consideration  ^^ 

V,               V^ 
viva  voce  _  3\-         "^  7\^ 

value  their  .>»—  . 

voluntary  assignment  V.  ^ 

variety  of  ^^  « 

w 

variety  of  causes 

War  record 

very  best    \_-  . 

warm  weather          ^~~v 
> 

very  certain   \a^~-^ 

was  a  .    . 

very  clear  S. 

was  all    ' 

86             PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

was  an  .  _  . 
was  another  .</  . 

was  said  or  done  there.  ?[./1 
was  so  N 

was  as 

was  that    ( 

was  done   ( 

was  the  .  .  . 

v    J 

WHS  he  f~^ 

was  their  / 

was  he  ever  '"^ 

was  their  own  / 
\ 

was  he  not 

was  then  ( 

was  he  the  *^ 

1 

was  there      / 

was  he  there    *     ^ 

was  there  any   / 

was  her  ^N 

was  there  any  body   / 

was  his  " 

was  there  any  one    / 

k                   "vj^*-*- 

was  his  own  •*—  ' 

)         • 

was  there  anything    L^^_^ 

was  it  ... 

was  there  -any  thing  else  i^-^ 

was  it  before  \> 

^ 
was  there  anything  else  said    J^., 
-*           "^^T 

was  it  not 

)             r 
was  there  anything  said  £_-« 

was  it  so  S 

>n 

was  thr  anyt'g  said  and  done^ 
-  -^-^^^p 

was  not  I* 

was  thr  anyt'g  said  and  done  lhr\  J 

was  not  intended   '  —  -\ 

was  thr  anyt'g  said  or  done^^^f 

was  not  it  M 

was  thr  anyt  g  said  or  done  thr  J      J 
\^^fA 

was  not  known  *•"  —  ? 

was  there  anything  said  there^*^ 

was  not  seen  *•*  —  ' 

')                                0  J 
was  there  no  j_^ 

was  or  not 

was  or  was  not  5 
) 

was  there  no  one  C_x^ 

was  there  no  one  elseO->. 
fe     ") 

was  present     %<,_, 

was  there  no  one  else  there  ^^. 

was  received 

}                  U 
was  there  nothing  </ 

was  said    \ 

was  there  nothing  said   </ 
)                        ^-f 

was  said  and  done    -J-  - 

was  you-r 

1        J 

was  said  and  done  there    J 

way  of     O 

was  said  or  done  y^          J 

Ways  and  Means    V~a 

PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE  BOOK. 

87 

we  admit  .  S 

we  could  not  remember  ,  . 

K^ 

•v 

we  affirm  v_^^ 

V-s» 

we  all  rxxr~ 

we  decline  _«j,_.  ., 

we  are  T^- 

we  defend    t^ 

we  are  not  -^. 

we  denounce  **  —  -^ 

we  are  satisfied   ^N 

1           \ 
we  at  first    "            ^~ 

we  deny    {—/ 
we  deserve   j^ 

Y 

we  at  last    ' 

we  did  .  1 

we  at  least   J 

we  did  not  .     . 

we  attempt     L-» 

we  did  not  know.     . 

5  • 

we  believe  r>._ 
we  belong   ~-v 

we  did  not  know  there  was 
we  did  not  think  5 

^ 

we  call    -x     ^^ 

we  did  not  understand  

we  call  upon    ~^ 

we  differ.  ."j. 

—  f 

we  called  up*bn  ~~\ 

we  disclaim  .1 

^    s>  —  \ 

we  can   "X                ? 

we  dispute    \ 
1 

we  can  have   ~"\    ., 

we  distrust  * 

we  cannot    ~N^ 

1        " 
we  do_J 

we  cannot  have  """N 

we  do  not,  5.. 

we  cannot  have  the      s 

we  do  not  know,  5  ^._ 

we  cannot  have  their  ~>\ 

we  do  not  think  .5.. 

we  cannot  know  ""^            ^  — 

we  doubt 

we  cannot  remember  ^\ 

we  ever   >»- 

we  change.  /. 

we  fail    \. 

we  charge  .  '  _ 

( 
we  fear_\^. 

we  could  .... 

we  feel      _  ^_ 

<;      f 

we  could  have  

we  find  __  . 

we  could  not  

we  found  . 
"x           Q 

we  could  not  have  

1 
we  had  ...     tftf... 

88            PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE  BOOK. 

we  had  not  .  .  . 

we  took  pains   \  . 

we  have  -  T^  . 

we  went  ^N            ° 

we  have  been  ~"  X 

we  were   ~*\/ 

we  have  been  thr  -^ 

we  have  done      —  •>>       * 
P 

we  were  not    ^N/, 
we  were  there   ~*\/7 

we  have  had  ~~N 

we  will     pv 

we  have  not       —  x 

we  will  not     <^>N 

we  have  not  been  ~"~\ 

we  wish  ^>j-   itf'-J- 

we  have  your  own  ~~v 

we  won't      ~x 

we  may  ~^ 

•we  would  -x 

we  may  say  ~\_ 

we  may  soon  ~"N 

•we  would  be  ~\ 
we  would  not  ^\ 

we  might  ->, 

Wednesday  afternoon      (^o 

we  niuot  ~~\^^ 

week  after.  TN.                       tv  •? 

we  ought    1 

week  after  that   ~^ 

we  ought  not. 

week  after  week  "^        ^nf. 

we  ought  to  L 

week  afterwards  ~^ 

we  received  ~\^- 

week  or  ten  days  ^y__V^_  ij 

we  regret     —  x    /     OV  •/ 

week  or  two  "^           J' 

we  saw    / 

weeks  after  "N 

we  say  ) 

weeks  ago  "x 

we  see   \. 

well  done  f_\ 

we  shall    _ 

well  known  I 

we  should     1. 

well,  now  1 

we  talked  .  L 

well,  perhaps   f      N. 

we  thank-ed    v 

X} 

well,  sir   (} 

we  therefore  ^""Sy 

well,  then   ((, 

^ 
we  think   \  . 

went  out  of    ~b 

we  thought 

went  up  "^ 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        89 

were  a-n  .  xT^ 

Wesleyan  Church  -jf-7 

were  all     </ 

what  a.k. 

were  as    S 

what  an  J 

were  it    X 

1 
what  are    I 

were  it  not  X^ 

what  are  they  J 

were  its    S 

V   i 

what  are  those      J 

n  (a 

were  not   ^ 

what  are  you-r  li 

were  of    / 

what  are  your  own    J 

were  the   X 
were  the  other  x7 

what  are  your  own  views    J 
what  can.l  

were  there    X^ 

were  there  not  X<L 

what  can  it   1  

were  they  /\ 

1  , 
what  did  you    J     n 

were  those  X\, 

what  do  yon    rj 

•were  we     Cs^ 

what  do  you  mean  n 

were  we  not   CX^ 

what  do  you  mean  by  such  M 

were  we  there  CX^ 

1            ^*- 

what  do  you  mean  to  h                _/° 

were  you   O 

what  do  you  m'n  to  be  underst'd  rV 

were  you  aware  O 
were  you  called  upon  C-     \ 

what  do  you  mean  to  do  K                r 
what  do  you  recollect  rj/   ' 

were  you  certain    Cs 

what  do  you  remember  n 

were  you  engaged    O 

what  do  you  say  n 

were  you  ever  (>>_ 

what  do  you  seen  * 

were  you  in  the  habit    <^ 

what  else  r 

were  you  informed   (^ 

what  else  was  V) 

.S*-' 

were  you  not    C, 

what  else  was  done  r  ~) 

were  you  notified    C^- 

what  else  was  done  there  IO 

were  you  present  &    \_s 

what  else  was  said  rD         J 

were  you  then   (^  (* 

what  else  was  said  and  done  rj 
J 

90             PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK 

what  else  was  said  or  done.^O  *     -=»• 

what  is  your  ..4. 

what  else  was  said  or  done  thr  KD  .. 
what  else  was  said  there    ]fj          J 

what  it.J. 
what  it  is   fc 

IxOv              U 

what  else  was  there  r     J 

what  it  is  worth    ^ 

what  had  you  n 

what  it  was  O 

b 

what  had  you  done  H 

what  its    L 

what  has   b 

what  makes  l^~v  —  o 

what  has  been    tL 

what  makes  them   \^~--f 

what  has  it  b 

what  makes  you-r  I—  1/ 

what  has  not  been  l_/v 

what  may  i- 

what  lias  that  i 

what  month  v~*  —  -i 

i                           V 

what  has  the  b 

what  of  L. 

what  has  thr   L> 

what  question  J 

what  has  this  f 

1    8  X 

what  reason  V 

1 
what  have  I 

what  the    1 

what  have  been  Uv^ 

what  then    J 

__ 

what  they  i 

what  have  you  been    Lv. 
I     ^ 

V  P 

what  time...    crt   1-  —  x 

what  have  you  done  L 

1                  ~ 

—  s  1 
what  took  place  1 

o      —  ^ 

what  he  L«-s 

what  was  b                 ^* 

what  he  said   U-h 

.     p 
what  was  afterwards   b 

O       ^~~^ 

what  he  was  I—  v 

what  was  done   L 

what  he  was  not  U-^ 

what  was  he  >—  «\ 

what  is    b 

what  was  it  |> 

\vhat  is  it  (or  the)  b 

what  was  necessary  \^Q/ 

what  is  that  i 

what  was  said  n 

what  is  thr  0 

i      -B- 

what  was  said  and  done  P 

I        0 

what  is  then    U 

what  was  said  and  done  there    b 
O           r 

what  is  this  L 

V3 

what  was  said  or  done  U 

PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.            91 

what  was  said  or  done  there.  Q, 
what  was  said  there  U                  J 

n     v 

what  was  she  L 

what  you  r  .  .  |  .  . 
what  you  believe     J 

n 

what  you  can      1  

n 

what  was  that   L 

what  you  can  do     1  —  . 
/^ 

'  *hat  was  the  ts 

1 
what  you  claim    J     ^~^ 

what  was  then    L 

what  you  have      L 

nC 

what  was  thr  0 

n 

what  you  remember     t—  N 

what  was  this    L 

what  you  said     p 

o  I 

C  p 

what  was  your      L 

what  you  say     L 

)n 

P 
what  we.  1. 

what  you  think       ) 

what  we  believe  4.^ 

ov 

what  you  were      I/ 

what  we  call  \  

when  a-n  TV. 

p 
what  we  can  1  

when  are       l 

what  we  claim  L_^^N 

when  are  you-r     V 

what  we  have  L 

when  do  yoa  (ar  bad  yonf\l 

what  we  said  b 

when  have     O 

pi 
what  we  say  L 

when  he  ^V^N 

)   p 
what  we  think  J 

when  he  came  ~\-~v__x  —  x 

IV 
what  •were    I/ 

when  he  came  there~\—  v_  -/"     N 

what  were  its  \? 
\  /*• 

when  he  •was  ^V-x 

what  were  we  V 

when  I      ^, 

what  were  you  v 

when  is      a 

what  were  you  doing    I  ''    I,  ,, 

when  is  it  (or  the)      ^) 

what  will   1 

when  is  tbr     u 

what  will  be    [^ 

when  it  .">. 

what  will  we  ,1 

when  it  has   ~8 

what  will  you   L 

when  it  has  been  ~X^ 

what  would    \    ft-   j 

wlieu  it  is  "> 

what  would  be  k 

when  it  is  done   ~h 

92         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

when  it  is  known  .">  —  •? 

when  vou  make~>V^^ 

when  it  is  necessary  ~VJ>/ 

when  you  were  ^V/ 

when  it  may  ~V—  v 

where  a  .  ^T 

when  it  was  "V     <rts  "^ 

/            * 

when  its  ~"> 

where  are    c 
where  are  thr    c-^ 

when  that  ~"^ 

where  are  they  f\ 

when  the  .">_ 

where  are  those  c    (o 

when  thr     /\  - 
when  there  is~~>\ 
when  there  is  no    \ 

where  arc  we   c 
where  are  you-r    c 
where  are  your  own    e^ti 

J-  —  - 
when  there  is  not  ~""\ 

when  there  was  ^N 
when  they  ~~^           / 
when  this  (or  those)  ""^ 
when  was  ~~^ 

where  did  you    ^       (rts  •/ 
where  do    s*\ 
where  do  they  x^J 
where  do  yon 
where  do  you  live    /    Y  V. 

'q 

when  we    4 
when  we  come      !i__ 

where  do  you  m'n  to  be  und'st'd 
where  do  you  now  /  l^_^, 

/S 

when  we  do      j, 
when  we  do  not      j 
when  •we  were~^\/' 

where  do  you  reside  /    1/1 
where  do  you  say  /    I 
where  does   ./\ 

when  were     i/ 

where  does  this  /   L 

when  were  we  ^Tr 

where  had  you      '      1 

when  were  you  ^V/ 

where  has   X"^ 

when  will       1 
when  will  you-r  ^> 

where  has  it  'or  the)   S 
where  has  thr    s^ 

when  would  ^ 

where  have   x**V.    <rt-  -^ 

when  you-r      » 

where  have  the  X*^    <rts  S 

when  you  are  ^ 

where  have  they  /    v_ 

when  you  are  there  ^ 

\\here  liave  we    /\^ 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        93 

where  have  you    ^-^^^ 

where  was  your  place  .Cef 

^-0 

where  have  you  been  X^, 

where  was  your  place  of  busin's 

where  is    -^ 

where  we  C^^                        ^S^_ 

where  is  it  (or  the)   X^ 

where  we  had    CX  j 

where  is  that    X*^ 

where  we  have   C-^ 

where  is  thr    s^ 

where  we  were  C-^ 

where  is  your      ^\ 

where  were    ^^ 

where  is  your  place    sC 

,/t 
where  were  they  X^ 
/( 

where  is  your  place  of  business. 

where  were  those  ^^ 

-  ^. 

where  it     ^                              ^* 
^"^_p 

where  were  we  ^^ 

where  it  has  been     -^. 

where  were  you     <X 

where  it  has  not  been    -^^\ 

where  will     <^ 

where  it  is  (or  its)    *? 

where  will  it  (pr  the)    <s 

where  it  is  not    -^ 

where  will  thr    </^- 

where  one    (-/ 

where  will  they   «X"V 

where  the     s 

where  will  we   ^-^ 

where  thr     / 

where  will  you-r  <^ 

where  there  has  be«n    x    ^k 

where  will  your  own    <Xf 

where  there  is     X"* 

where  would     x^^ 

where  there  is  one    -X^s 

where  would  they  <X^ 

where  there  was    /? 

where  would  we    ^^^ 

) 

where  was    C^ 

where  would  you    Xf 

where  was  it     C^ 

wherever  the    ^ 

where  was  she    CX/ 

wherever  thr    / 

where  was  that  CXv 

whether  a   ~T*X. 

where  was  the    cX7 

whether  he  ~~N 

where  was  thr   CJ^ 

l^> 

whether  he  ever  ~~N 

where  was  this  C^C 

»~N 

whether  lie  lias  ~"\  >^ 

where  was  your  Cs\ 

whether  be  -was     N 

h 

94         PHONOGRAPHIC  -PHRASE  BOOK. 

whether  I  T5y 

which  has  nothing  -0^-  - 

whether  or  not  ~~*\ 

which  has  now    $_^ 

whether  the  ~>. 

which  have   / 

whether  we  ^\ 

which  have  a-n  ^ 

whether  we  shall           \ 

which  have  anything  ^C_--x_^- 

whether  we  were     ~J      \ 

which  have  become   /^ 

_                      \S 

whether  you-r    ^ 

,    \  

which  have  been  \^ 

whether  you  are       \ 

which  have  done  c. 

whether  you  nave      \ 
& 

which  have  never  l^_  . 

wh'r  you  may  (or  remember)~^\ 

which  have  no    l^_^ 

wh'r  you  were  (or  recollect)~N 

which  liave  not    ^_^ 

which  a  <..-   <rt-    / 

which  have  not  been  /L^. 

which  an  -i/ 

which  have  nothing   ,£. 

. 

which  have  the  -^ 

which  are.  /  _ 

which  have  thr  ./. 

which  are  likely  r~ 

which  have  their  own    / 

which  are  necessary  /ox/ 

which  he  may  have  £—*s~^) 

which  are  not    /     t^i-   J 

which  is  6 

which  are  you    / 

which  is  it  / 

which  can    Z  — 

which  is  never  ^. 

which  can  be    L  

,              N__ 

which  is  no   t>  ^ 

which  cannot   2, 

which  is  not   ^ 

which  cannot  be    Z, 

which  is  nothing:  4-, 

which  had    /     ^^  / 
|  / 

which  is  now    4_^t 

which  has     6 

which  is  the   / 

which  has  been  dL 

which  is  thr    Q 

which  has  never      ^, 

which  is  your    J> 

which  has  not     ^ 

which  it  ./ 

which  has  not  been   <i>v 

which  it  is  (or  its)  / 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        95 

which  it  is  not  _^_  . 

which  we  call  -</-^ 

which  made  A 

which  we  claim  ^_^—~^ 

which  makes    /->  —  o 

which  we  have    / 

which  matters  little  f'     "B 
which  matters  not   /  j^ 

which  we  have  had   u 
/7 
which  we  have  not  been    t^. 

which  may     r~~* 

which  we  maintain     X»___^ 

which  might    /-- 

which  we  make     /-^ 

which  must    /^ 

which  we  say    / 

which  muHt  be  *~a^ 

j 
which  were    6^ 

which  must  not   /—  »^ 

which  were  in    fr 

which  must  not  be   /-»_  ^ 

which  were  never   t/^    \_ 

which  of  .  I. 

/  s*^_^s 

which  were  no  fr 

which  of  the  ./ 

which  were  not    f* 

which  of  their  ./,  . 

/ 
which  of  their  own  / 

which  were  nothing  r        \^_^ 
which  were  on    r 

which  one  </' 

which  were  then     ^^\ 

which  our  / 

which  were  thr  r' 

which  seems    y—  B 

which  were  they  ^\ 

which  seems  to  be  ^tv. 
which  the  -  /. 

which  were  those  (or  thus)  ^[^ 
which  will  / 

which  thr    (J 
which  was    6 

which  will  be    / 

yi 

which  will  come    Z  

which  was  never  £_. 
which  was  no  4_^ 
which  was  not   4x 

which  will  indeed   / 
which  will  no  doubt  ^_^ 
which  will  not  J1 

which  was  nothing   §^ 

f>S 

which  will  require   r~ 

/~)    ^  ' 
which  was  only  ^J, 

which  would    j 

which  we 
which  we  believe    ,/ 

which  would  be  / 
which  would  indeed    / 

96        PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

which  would  never    _  /  

while  he  may     ^~*s-\ 

which  would  no  doubt   / 

while  he  was       ^^ 

which  would  not      / 

while  it  

which  would  not  be    /^ 

while  it  is  (or  its) 

which  would  show   / 

while  it  is  not 

n  -J 

which  you     / 

while  the 

which  you  believe     J 

CN 

while  thr    .  .1. 

1  ^ 

which  you  can     £_  

while  there  has       j 

which  you,  cannot      2 

which  you  claim     J    ^^ 

while  there  has  not  V  ^ 

which  you  have    / 

while  there  is       J 

which  you  have  been      <!^ 

while  there  is  »ny  ._1  

which  you  have  done  / 

while  there  is  anything     X--^^x 

J/? 

which  you  have  never      ^  

while  there  is  no        *  * 

which  you  have  no     <£__^ 

while  there  is  not      ol_^ 

which  you  have  not     L-, 

CN 
while  there  is  nothing      JL_y 

which  you  have  not  been    '  ^~^. 

n 

which  you  have  not  done    '  L- 

/?  J 
which  you  have  not  taken   L. 

0\                      L^ 
while  they      ( 

cx 

while  they  are      .  _i  . 
while  they  were     f   .s 

which  you  made    .A 

while  you-r 

/} 
which  you  may     /—  ^              ~ 

.    -  /^                0 

which  you  may  not  understand 

while  you  are    ( 
while  you  are  there  / 

which  you  say    / 

while  you  must        *^"^> 

while  a  ... 

while  yon  -were 

while  an 

who  also  ,^./^\ 

while  another      _  o_  . 

who  also  was  present  ^^jO 

while  he 

who  always          /~~N          1. 
^*~**      °           ^q_, 

while  he  has       *~~*> 

who  are   -j^ 

while  he  U    "  ^^* 

who  are  not  

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.           97 

who  are  the   -<Jfc>- 

who  have  not  ^~ 

who  are  thr       _^^ 

who  have  not  been 

who  are  they    ^_^^ 
who  are  those  ^.^ 
who  are  we 

who  have  not  done            ' 
who  have  nothing          \ 
who  he  was    -—  _.  ^—  x 

who  are  you 
who  came             ^^_^ 
who  came  there           ^^  — 

who  is 
who  is  it  (or  the)  ^_ 
who  is  thr 

who  can 

who  it   ^ 

who  coukl                      PI, 
who  else    ^/*» 

who  it  is  (or  its) 
who  makes      —/->.,, 

who  else  was    —^f\ 
who  else  was  present  ^^°\ 
who  else  was  there    ~J*\     ^^ 
who  had 
who  has 

who  may 
who  may  be 
who  may  not 
who  may  not  be 
who  mean 

who  has  been 

who  mean  to  be 

who  has  been  thr 

who  mast 

who  has  done                  ^ 

who  of    ^_^ 

who  has  never 

who  said 

who  has  no   ^—^ 

who  said  so  '  ^\ 

who  has  not    ^_^ 

who  said  there  was  ^_^ 

who  has  nothing 
who  has  the                      —  ' 

who  thr                       V 

who  therefore   ^_^^ 

who  has  thr 

who  told    ^_^ 

who  have 
who  have  been 

who  told  him 
who  told  me  .               ^t 

_           <.C-             .. 

who  have  been  thr 
who  have  had     ^5 

U—  \               1 
who  told  that 

"7 

who  told  them      *• 

? 

98         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

who  told  us     

why  an  . 

*t 

who  told  you-r    j 

why  another  .    .J.    . 

who  was     ^_ 

^v 

why  are 

who  was  not    ^^ 

why  are  we       \ 

who  was  thr 

why  are  you-r       *" 

who  were  x-v/'  / 

why  do  you 

wlio  were  not  ^_^/> 

why  had  

who  were  present  ^^/^V 

why  has       ° 

who  were  there          /"} 

why  has  it  (or  the)     ' 

who  were  they           x/ 

why  has  thr     ^ 

—  v 

who  were  we            x* 

why  have 

who  were  you-r  ^^/~ 

why  is 

who  will 

why  is  it  (or  the) 

cT1^ 

-K 

who  would          ff'i/ 

why  is  thr      w 

b             >*-i 

who  would  be    .  . 

why  it  

k 

who  would  not  

why  it  is  (or  its) 

who  would  not  be  

why  it  is  not 

whom  we    ^_^^             N 

why  not     " 

whom  will 

why  the 

whom  will  we    

why  thr       _\_  . 

whom  will  you    ^_^ 

why  there  is  no      oL-^ 

whom  you 

why  there  is  no  more      X_>~N 

whose  handwriting  ^c-^^ 

why  there  is  no  more  than    d^f~^, 

—  -v 

whose  signature  ^  

why  there  is  not       d^- 
^^ 

whose  was    ^_ 

why  there  is  nothing      d^_^ 

—  v 

•whose  were       _  / 

why  there  is  so  much      J 

•"""o 
whose  were  they   ^^/i 

~>                     ^ 
why  was       N                      / 

whose  were  those     _,,// 

why  we     a 

why  a  .  „ 

why  we  can      '  

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.        99 

why  we  know  _  ,S—  ' 

will  not  say    »-  - 

why  we  say          \ 

will  perhaps     xA. 

"V 

why  we  think    / 

will  probably  ,r\. 

\, 

why  we  were    *^ 

will  the  -^  - 

why  will 

will  thr  .  /T 

why  will  it  (or  the) 

will  there  be   /^     > 

why  will  thr          i 

.  will  there  never    f           ^~- 

why  would       ' 

will  there  not   f 

why  would  we       V^ 

/~~^  —  \ 
will  there  not  be  /         \ 

why  you-r 

will  therefore    /      ^~ 

< 

why  you  can      "  

will  they  (7 

why  you  cannot      ^~* 

will  they  have   /7 

why  you  have    S\ 

will  you-r   ( 

why  you  make     ^^ 

will  you  be   (\ 

"V 

why  you  may              x 

will  you  be  kind  enouglyx 

why  you  must      *^~*> 

^^~-^V 
will  you  be  thr  /^\ 

why  yon  -were     ^/^ 

will  you  havex?*" 

will  all  -xrr 
U 

will  you  look      /**^ 

/*" 

will  another  _  /.  . 

will  you  look  at  [ 

will  be   .^\ 

will  you  look  at  this  papej.^      "j 

(o 

will  be  dene      ^V 

win  a   _-TV_  .                                    N\ 
*   =^. 

will  be  found  /"V 

winter  time        |) 
<-v    L    v 

will  be  seen   /"\ 

wire  puller     V  X~N 

will  have    /7 

with  a  ,/.. 

will  it  -  -.- 

with  advantage  ( 

will  it  not     __,, 

with  all    r, 

will  not   -»- 

with  all  its   --- 

k> 

will  not  be 
will  not  go 

with  all  that     /) 
with  all  that  that'V  " 

100       PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

with  all  their  .  /)_ 

with  which  it  is  not  .  C-  . 

with  an   (  _ 

with  you-r   ( 

with  another-/  - 

with  your  own     / 

with  as    ( 
with  him  / 

with  your  sanction    f 
with  yourself  /       *-2 

with  him  there  ( 

within  a  ./  . 

with  it 

within  the  .  .  . 

with  its 

*O 

within  their./.. 

with  its  own 

within  their  own./.. 

e^ 

s      r^ 

with  many  / 

without  a_> 

with  me   /         ^    / 

without  doubt    ) 
t 

with  or  without         ( 

without  that   ( 

> 

> 

with  reference  /    i  v 
with  regard  (/" 

without  the. 
without  thr  v  .  . 

with  regret   /     / 

without  this  (or  those)  \> 

with  relation  /   O 

witness'  stand  . 

\_p 

with  respect  /  J( 

won't  be  :v. 

with  the-  .- 

won't  endeavor  "»  ^ 

with  the  subject  ... 

won't  know  ~s  - 

with  their  ./.  . 

won't  know  anything  ~^_^^^^_^ 

with  them     ( 

won't  notice  ~>  . 

with  them  that    I 

won't  say   ~5 

with  themselves  \  / 

won't  understand  ~X^_j> 

with  this  (or  those)     ( 

won't  undertake  ~i  ^. 

L_ 

with  this  understanding  / 
with  which      (                ^*  1 

Word  of  God    ~\_ 
words  of  God   *>- 

/                        ^ 

with  which  he   ( 

words  of  ray  text  c>v_^=> 

with  which  it     ( 

words  of  our  text  *>  [_^= 

with  which  it  is   ( 

working  days   ^ 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.       101 

working  there  -  -  -  <  s^-  -^  

would  not  you  have    -  -^  - 

/ 

C 

worth  a     \ 

would  require  ~"\/  \ 

would  a    r^Y 

would  say.  ).  . 

would  all  ~~*y'~~ 

would  see  3  -  - 

would  an    ~^ 

would  such  -v 

would  be    ~"N. 

^•k 

would  the  -  <^- 

would  be  sufficient  "~N 

1            ?    >b 
would  do  J  .   n>    \_ 

would  thr  -"r>«< 
would  there  be  ~^ 

would  have   -^- 

would  they  —x    <f^^^  \  ^  _ 

would  have  been   ~7^ 

would  we  "> 

would  have  been  there  '•> 
would  have  done   "75 

would  you-r  ~Y 
woukl  you  have  ~> 

would  have  said  ~?\ 

would  you  not   ~> 

would  he  ~^^ 
would  he  not  ~"^ 

would  you  not  have  known  -> 
would  you  not  know      ~^ 

would  it  -  .  _ 

Y 

would  it  be 
would  it  make    —  ^^ 

Year  after  year     -s^- 
year  ago./^.        I 

would  make  ~*V-N_. 

year  and  a  half  S 

would  not  -  =_- 

year  or  two  SA 

would  not  be    _ 
would  not  be  very 

years  afterwards  £ 
years  ago  £ 

would  not  do  _ 

years  and  years      f 

would  not  have 

^•^ 

years  before  /•• 

would  uot  have  been 

years  old    £ 
™ 

X 

would  not  have  said 

year's  rent    s^ 

would  not  say 

yes  or  no    C^" 

would  not  see 

yes,  sir.O.  . 

^ 

- 

would  not  you     • 

yet  a    5 

102       PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

yet  an    C-  - 

you  are  acquainted  -/?- 

yet  another.xt 

you  arc  aware  XJ         ' 

yet  h-as  fc 

i 
you  are  not   . 

yet  have  G> 

you  are  said    f 
\ 

yet  it,  r.  . 

you  are  satisfied    /" 

yet  it  has    (, 

you  are  supposed  r_    f 

V. 

yet  it  has  no  ^  ^ 

^| 
you  arc  sure     C 

) 

yet  it  has  not  & 

you  are  sure  of  it   /" 
J 

yet  it  has  nothing  <- 
yet  it  is   (, 
yet  it  is  no  ^  x 

you  are  very  sure^     /^ 
you  are  very  sure  of  it  _x 
you  believe           /^ 

v  \    »  

^ 

yet  it  is  not  t' 

you  can  ft- 

yet  it  is  nothing  G. 

you  can  be           \ 

yet  its  6 

you  can  have 

yet  the  f 

you  can  never                X- 

yet  thr.A 

»—  f 

you  can  state 

yet  there  has  been  -/^~. 

you  can  tell 

yet  there  is  _  /T.          ^" 

you  cannot 

yet  there  is  no./f. 

you  could   -  

yet  there  is  not  .  Xl 

you  could  be 

yet  we    { 

you  could  do 

n 

yet  you-r    C 

you  could  have     , 

you  all  .  .  _ 

you  could  not   ^ 

you  and.xT. 

you  could  state 

you  and  I    f 

you  could  tell 

you  and  your   X" 

you  did  .1  _ 

you  another    ~f~ 

you  did  say   1 

you  are   /" 

you  did  not    '  

you  are  able  to    /" 

you  did  not  know 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.       103 

you  did  not  say    -.-  - 
you  did  not  think' 
you  do    1                 N 
you  do  not  J).  . 

•  you  have  said  -  -£T- 
you  have  seen  X 
you  have  spoken    x" 
you  knew  

you  do  not  know  ^  „ 

you  know  ^  x 

you  do  not  know  them   ^. 
you  do  not  say    1 
you  do  not  think    '3 
1          ^ 

you  know  nothing    ~^»^_, 
you  know  whether  >-—  ^->. 

you  made  ~-N 

you  do  say    1 

you  may  -^—^ 

H      ) 

you  ever  V^_ 

you  mean  -ry^_s  - 

you  fear  .^t 

you  mean  to  .^. 

you  feel     _H_ 

V4           /^ 

you  find 

you  mean  to  be   ^ 
you  mean  to  say 

you  found  
you  had  fa  _  \  _ 

you  might  _T1 
you  might  not  /v" 

you  had  not  

you  might  not  be  "^~^\ 

you  have  _X~_ 

you  must   *^-*> 

you  have  a    X^ 

you  must  be  ^'~»s. 

you  have  anything    x~ 
you  have  been  X" 

you  must  be  sure  ~-i>. 

y 

you  must  be  sure  of  it  —  -*s. 

you  have  been  there  x; 
you  have  done  £T 

you  must  bear  in  mind  ^—  NV5>-^ 
you  must  have  been  ~^~\ 

you  have  had  XT 
you  have  known  (or  none')  x~ 

you  must  never   ~-c*^, 
you  must  not  ^-&_^ 

you  have  never  /^. 
you  have  no  (^_^ 

you  must  not  be  /^-v>v 
you  must  now  ~—^_^ 

you  have  not    XT 

you  must  recall   «*-* 

you  have  nothing  X^_ 
you  have  noticed  x"     ^^ 

you  must  recollect     ^_/ 
you  recall   ~/ 

104       PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

you  represent  ^/\  . 

you  should  never  JJ 

you  require  .... 

T     <-\^ 

you  lhank-ed  .  .  _ 

you  saw_  .  _ 

you  think  _Y_  _ 

you  mmy.J. 

you  told  -/?. 

you  say  you    X 

you  understand  _  T.  .  . 

you  say  you  can  X  

you  understood  ^~^r-f. 

you  say  you  cannot   X_, 

you  were   ^/_  , 

you  say  you  may  L  —  ., 

you  were  called  upon   */    \ 

you  say  you  mean  L—> 

you  were  not  */* 

you  say  you  must   >t—  •& 

you  were  there  •/* 

you  see  JJ-  _ 

you  will./2. 

you  see  there  ?\.. 

you  will  believe   /? 

you  see  there  is  _*V  . 
you  shall  .  .  . 

you  will  call  upon     /? 
you  will  claim  /5             a 

you  shall  be  <^ 

you  will  not  -,_-  - 

you  shall  do  r 
you  shall  have 

you  will  therefore  -/'?- 
you  would    /" 

«j 

you  shall  not  

you  shall  not  be  "rX,- 
you  shall  therefore  .<^/. 

you  would  have    f 
young  man  5T?_ 
young  men_^?_ 

you  should  .JJ. 

young  person   ^^  .  . 

you  should  be  J 

young  woman  C—± 

you  should  be  certain  J) 

your  belief  _/^  . 

you  should  be  sure  JJ 

your  Honor  f 

you  should  be  there  --\jj 

—  *t^ 

your  letter       .  /-/  

you  should  do  _} 

your  mind  .  f- 

you  should  have  ^ 

your  own  .f  . 

you  should  not 

your  own  account  f 

you  should  not  be  .*).  . 

your  own  note  S" 

PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.      105 

ABBREVIATIONS  OF  PRJ« 
A 

According 

LCTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

baptism  
because  
become    N  \  f   ~\\  V      .  ^- 
before  X     \T* 
began 
begin 

acknowledge              '_      •'       f? 

administratrix  U  —  ^  9  —  ° 
advantage  _/_  /_/  £_p_   k  .. 
advertise  •_  •_  A         **      *^\ 

almost  
already   C 
altogether  
among  s__x  •*_#? 
an  
and  
angel    f    £--   </_ 
another   ^  

begun    ___, 

belie  f-ve   ^           ^      t       1     -  —  < 
«  V^   c\     V"*         A 
belong  _\  _  _  .  \_  .  X^ 

beneficial  _\  V  _  _ 
benignant  ^^  -  
between  _  1  _  _ 

C 

beyond   
bishopric   _  _V  _  _ 
brethren     o 
brother    \        A     / 
but    \ 

C 

Cabinet  \  _ 
can  
capable      \     V,    —  v                 \ 

antagonistic 

any  

archangel  .  y\_  _ 
archbishop  -4.. 
architecture-al          1 
are  
aristocracy-tic   ,_q_. 

artificial  -  /^--/.  _  /I  _  _  /; 

o 
as  

astonish-ed 

.  -x"       l" 

captain          * 

catholic  _  _  _  _ 
celestial-ly   b/ 

awe   '    "1      •'      "L_  ^     ^ 

\B 

Bankrupt  _  '  —  ^\ 

change  /     /      /   /v      /     _7         / 

^         \ 

characteristic    c  -*1  — 
charge  !  -  V  -/-^ 

bankruptcy.  _S-<y_ 

106          PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

children  __/* 

distinct    1      I         ^—^     ~^-^t     , 

i      ^f    —f 
Christian                         °> 

~\~'\t^s>~     "I  \t^f 

P 
circumstance  _J 

circumstantial  _  _  _ 
citizen    P. 

do.L 
1 

Dr.  (Doctor)   ' 
I      ^1 

doctrine    | 

J 
collect   c  =  1     c  

come    —  ,  
contingency  -L- 
controversyJ^--^ 
correct  c  c           1   c  
could              .    I  c  '      <.  ^_y 

I        H 

dollar.1-, 
domestic    U~j,  — 

during  .1  _ 

p    n    n     n 

dwell  III        L 

B 

Effect    *s  ^  V  

\  — 
county  

cross-examine 

endeavor         L    v  —  -t          ^ 

D 

December    J  —  s 
defendant  I 

degree  -<?ta=^-- 

establish  _>i    .  X.X,^  -x-- 
.  evangelical    ^-^^^ 
ever  V^ 
executrix    —  a  o 

democracy-tic  

extraordinary        *               Y- 

democrat   v-  —  s 
describe 

F 

Fact 

description  -  --»y 

develop  L    l^    L      L            1^ 

V         \     Vi 
did*!.. 

difficult-y               /" 

familiarity  .^r^^l  _                  ^  —  Y 
February  Jw^.  _ 
financial-ly  _  rtrtT 

dignify   III 

for  ^_ 

dignity    1    _ 

discriminate  _|.  _ 

\,  7—  N       v^f—  ^~N 

found  -  _L  .  r-Tl  \(T~  \  

PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK.        107 

frequent          .                          '  —  <->| 

him  /~  <s  JIN  _7\_"^\  _              —  x 

from  

his  

G 

history      /   )f      ' 
*-fS. 

Gave  

home    y^~>  ^  —  >/          (^  —  -/       I^-~N-\ 

general-ly  J 

i 

generation  O       \       \      x^, 

i  6  t 

gentleman  

s 

l  

immediate                           s~ 

gentlemen  J 

importance-t             '   Jy^  ^^^"^^ 

give-n  

inartificial-ly_s-(_  ./_ 

•  glory   c  

.  indignity  

go  

indispensable-y   ^^ 

•  govern  _^_,  _=.  —^  _^ 

v—  1              "•  —  I     ^-^f   ^~A     /' 
.infer       V  ^^^       V.       V^      \_/ 

governor       V^_          ^    j      ^^ 

influence  _>^-i_  ^~^l^^lt  ^^voT^T^, 

Great  Britain    <=-<\ 

inscribe 

Had  J. 

half  ^~ 

halve  ./T" 

insurance 
v_P 

intelligence  J  -"yf    _/       /^ 

<      \          >> 

intelligent    *^J       t^— 

•  interrogatory          ' 

has 

hath  >_  . 

is  .  
o 

J 

have  __ 

January_Cr-_ 

health-y  I  ^  I  A    1  vl       IV     I  C 

Jr.  (Junior)     4 
jurisprudence  .  _5L  _ 

K 

heaven  ^    e^v_9^>^ 

Kingdom 

held..\     _\      .   /    . 

knew  

he.p?\  AA/^A/^ 

knowledge  .  _*  _ 

-\           r/AX"  /\/^ 

her     \                     /    V         f    V 

L_ 

L 

here  -"^N-.">\  -  ^^  -  -X]  -~^\  -  ^X- 

Language  _  _  _  _ 

108          PHONOGRAPHIC 

PHRASE  BOOK. 

*».'..  LJ.r.L. 

legislature    /  / 
length-  y         ( 
long  (adj.']  ^_  *^  _  **~^- 

u 

•  Malignant  -^^-  -  -^^-  -  -/"/-^  
manufactory            ^^^ 

0 

o  / 

ob'ject  .  _  .  _ 

object'  \\j     \ 
objection    >O        \\ 

^9 

•  observation      jf 
Oh    / 

manufacture            ~ 

opinion    \      \        \        \        o 

manufacturer  -^\- 
Massachusetts  _T^_ 
member  ^-^ 

x~^ 

memoranda      _        ' 

opportunity  V    _ 
other  5.  __ 
our    ' 

^     ^_ 

over                ;  

memorandum 

owe    /      1       /       6 

.  misdemeanor  ^~*\ 

own                                     <^  ^ 

1 

mistake  ,-  —  a  —  x~a  ,-  —  j,  —  3 

Mr.  (Mister)  _^_  .             "^~V 
mistook  
movement 

P 

Parliament-ary                V 

P»  x  v|  x 

particular     _ 

N 

never        V_                       '     V_ 

nevertheless  ^^  —  \J 
new                  f~ 

•X     N.   V  ^—.^ 

peculiar   \  \  -—_                  » 
\  —    \  —  f 

peculiar!  tyj-^^ 
.  pecuniary  _\     _ 

people  _<}_  _\     . 

V 

performance     \     . 

New  York      t  _ 

next    v.^ 

~i 
notwithstanding  .  l~*l 

v  —  1 

Vo 
perpendicular  £\     _ 
>«\ 
perpendicularity  |     -^-_ 

plionographer  _~-  - 
phonographic  ^^~ 

^-^l 
now  _ 

number  \    \  \   VLJS^ 

phouos^raphy  
plaintifif   _\__ 

PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE  BOOK.        109 


plenipotentiary  \ 
popular-ity    \  _  _Y 


prerogative 
preservation 

principal-le  <\_  .  !\_  _\ 
privilege  -^ 
probability  Jj 

probable-y    \_ '        \ 

<\  I 

proportion  _  \___if\_ 

public-sh 


remembrance 

representative  /  \  /\I  /\  <T»\ 

representation  /V)    / — f\} 

republic-sh   /\  A   A      Av 

A    N      ^/\^    A"^ 
repugnant  /  \__        /  \ — _/\ /- 

responsibility  _  A-  _A_ 
'  %b     60 J> 

responsible-y  ___^^^.°_ 
resurrection    X 
Rev.  (Reverend)  /\. 
.revolutionary  _/T5!i 
Roman  Catholic    /      (, 

s 

San  Francisco  _  _  ^_  _ 

P   ^ 
satisfaction  _*._ 

I 
satisfactory  f 

Savior  V_ 
send  _ 

CL^       , 

September 
several  V_ 

shall  _-A 
should  _  ) 
signify ^ 

"  '  L> 

similar  -  ..  _  J_     F    -> 


•  -  similarity 


~~ 


110 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE  BOOK. 


u 

Understood  J^-rrrjL 
usual-ly  _  ).  -V^.  . 


young    f        (        6 


your  _x:  „  x" 


_b_ 


PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 


ill 


WORDS    THAT    ARE    WRITTEN    OUT    OF    POSITION 

Advantage  _/_ 

altogether  .7P-  other _\  _  . 

another  ^~r~^l  over  .  _~  _ 

any own  .  _~  . 

do  JL  _  send 

for_L~ 

found 

gentleman 

go 


held  _. 


their  ( 

there  \  .  . 

0 
truth  J_. 

what  _{._ 
where.-/ 
which.  /_ 


EXERCISES  FOR  PRACTICE  ON  THE  PHRASES. 


112       PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK 


,^-^^^        1      _ 


PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.      113 


jt 


vi  X 


«•/. 


rrx.  _ 


e 


i ?_z>. 


-x^ 


114          PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE  BOOK. 


PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.      115 


5. 

—» 

J^lJ^s^  .^  / 

II^^J^-V^- 

^«\r--  ^ 

1  t       ^         Il^rfJ 

^  L 

V~-~c 

fa 

*..  yjj. sr= 

....^,. 

/         ^^"^T 

\         vJ  x  JQ~D.-\/ 
^A 

1  V   

c         <a 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


INTRODUCTORY. 

1.  As  applied  .to  phonography,  the  term  Phraseography  is 
usually  employed  to  denote  the  writing  of  two  or  more  words 
by  a  single  shorthand  outline. 

TWO   KINDS   OF  PHRASES. 

2.  The   Phrase-Signs   of    Practical   Phonography  may   be 
divided  into  two  general  classes,  viz. — 

a.  Those  that  are  formed  by  simply  joining  together,  with- 
out alteration,  the  ordinary  outlines  of  words  as  they  are 
written  when  standing  alone,  or  the  forms  that  are  found  in 
the  Dictionary  of  Practical  Phonography. 

EXAMPLES  : — About  it,  after  they,  as  long,  be  good  enough, 
can  be  seen,  for  many  years  after,  how  long  was  this,  it  is 
quite  clear,  where  do  they,  which  is  nothing,  etc. 

6.  Phrases  that  group  together,  by  means  of  the  stem-signs 
and  the  various  hooks,  modifications,  circles,  loops,  etc.,  all 
the  consonants  of  two  or  more  words,  without  regard  to  the 
form  of  each  individually.  In  such  phrases  a  portion,  and 
sometimes  all,  of  the  words  lose,  as  it  were,  their  identity  or 
individuality  of  outline  ;  although,  as  a  rule,  there  is  at  least 
one  word-form  that  stands  intact,  around  which  the  others 
gather  in  a  sort  of  verbal  cluster. 

EXAMPLES  : — At  all  their  own,  among  all  their,  are  we  able 
to,  before  or  after,  by  their  own,  day  after  day,  each  one,  for 
another,  had  therefore,  I  mean  to  have  it,  more  than  any 
other,  was  there  anything  said  or  done  there,  etc. 

3.  The  phrases  of  the  first  class   are,  of  course,  the  sim- 
plest in  their  construction,  the  words  being  joined   one  after 
another,  very  much  as  some  longhand   writers  connect  the 
words  on  each  line  of  the  paper. 

4.  But  in  the  second  ciass  of  phrases  all  of  the  element- 
ary principles  of  Phonography    are  brought   into  service  to 


118         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

write  the  collections  of  consonant-sounds  of  phrases,  very 
much  as  the  same  principles  are  used  in  writing  the  conso- 
nants of  single  words.  That  is  to  say,  the  briefest  method 
of  representing  them  is  adopted  that  is  consistent  with  both 
speed  and  legibility ;  no  particular  attention  being  paid  to 
derivation  and  meaning,  as  they  are  abundantly  able  to  take 
care  of  themselves,  provided  the  outlines  are  sufficiently 
ample  and  are  phonetically  correct. 

5.  The   older  systems   of    phonography,  with   their  tick 
and  dash  word-signs  for  several  of  the  most  frequent  words 
of  the  language,  are  not  nearly  so  well  adapted  to   making 
phrases  of  the  second  class  as  is  Practical  Phonography  ; 
and,  besides,   their  so-called  Corresponding  Style,  in  which 
the  outline  of  the  individual  word  is  of  paramount   import- 
ance, tends  to  foster  an  and  phrasing  disposition  and  habit, 
which  few  writers  are  ever  able  to  fully  outgrow. 

BRIEFEST   OUTLINES   NOT  ALWAYS   BEST. 

6.  It  is  not  always  best  to  write  outlines  in  the  very  brief- 
est way.      If  the  abbreviating  phrase-principles  of  Practical 
Phonography  were  applied  in  every  instance   where  it  was 
possible,  the  system  would  show  a  brevity  that  cannot  be 
secured  in  any  other  system,  except,  perhaps,  by  the  mutila- 
tion of  outlines  by  a  wholesale  practice  of  curtailment  or  ab- 
breviation, that  is  quite  incompatible  with  legibility. 

7.  But  experience  has  shown  that  it  is  better  oftentimes, 
for   the  sake  of  distinction   and  ease   of  reading,  to  use  a 
longer  form  than  the  briefest  that  the  system  provides. 

DIVIDED    PHRASE-SIGNS. 

8.  Although,    usuaLy,  when   we  speak    of  a   "  phrase- 
sign,"  we  mean  a  continuous,  unbroken  outline  that  is  used 
to  represent  two  or  more  words,  yet  the  term  is  also  some- 
times applied  with  propriety  to  outlines  that  are  broken  or 
divided,  either  for  the  purpose  of  using  proximity  as  a  means 
of  representation,  or  for  some  other  special  reason. 

EXAMPLES  : — A  good  deal,  all  of  that,  all  of  them,  by  the 
by,  I  am  confident,  etc. 

9.  As  the  expression  good  deal  is  almost  always  preceded 
by  the  article  a,  the  phrase   complete  is  a  good  deal,  rather 
than  simply  good  deal. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         119 

RULE   OF    POSITION    IN     PHRASES. 

10.  The  general  rule  for  the  position  of  phrase-signs  is 
that  the  outline  of  the  first  word  should  be  written  in  the  po- 
sition it  would  occupy  if  standing  alone. 

EXAMPLES  :- About  it,  by  that,  for  such  is  not,  he  was 
said,  near  as  possible,  on  the  subject,  this  defence. 

EXCEPTIONS.    ' 

11.  When  the  word  that  commences  the  phrase  belongs 
to  the  first  position,  and  is  written  with  a  circle,  loop,  hori- 
zontal stem,  or  any  half-length  stem,  if  necessary  to  secure 
greater  legibility — and  especially  when  the  second  word  de- 
pends upon  its  position  for  distinction — the  first  word  may 
be  raised  or  lowered,  as  the  case  may  be,  so  as  to  allow  the 
second  word  of  the  phrase  to  be  written  in  the  position  it 
would  occupy  if  standing  alone. 

EXAMPLES  : — As  good  as',  as  soon  as,  as  lately  as,  as  little 
as,  Honorable  gentleman,  Honorable  gentlemen,  on  this,  on 
these,  young  man,  young  men. 

12.  Mr. — The  abbreviation  Mr.  (mister)  maybe  written 
either  in  its  own  position  or  in  the  position  of  the  outline  that 
follows  it. 

EXAMPLES  : — Mr.  Chairman,  Mr.  President,  Mr.  Speaker. 

13.  With  this  exception,  all  outlines  of  the  third  position, 
when  they  commence  phrases,  are  written  in  that  position. 

EXAMPLES: — Any  better,  begin  again,  could  not  be,  in' his 
absence,  is  it  possible,  is  that  true,  is  there  nothing,  is  to  be. 

TICK-SIGNS   AND  BRIEF  W   AND  Y. 

14.  The  tick-signs  and  brief  w  and  y,  at   the  beginning  of 
phrases,  have  no  positions  of  their  own,  but  follow  those  of 
the  words  with  which  they  are  joined. 

EXAMPLES: — A  great,  a  little,  and  as,  and  is,  he  shall,  he 
should,  I  am,  I  have  had,  I  may,  I  mean,  I  ought,  I  think,  I 
think  it  is  ;  we  change,  we  charge,  we  did  not,  we  do  not,  we 
had  not,  we  saw,  we  say,  we  see,  we  wish,  would  do,  would 
see,  would  they,  you  knew,  you  know,  you  mean,  you  might, 
you  must. 

15.  But  when  a  phrase  is  composed  entirely  of  ticks,  or 
ticks  and  brief  w  and  y  signs,  the   general  rule  should   be 
observed,  and  the  first  word  written  in  position. 


42O         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE    BOOK. 

EXAMPLES  :— And  a,  and  I,  and  the,  I  have  a,  I  have  the, 
he  would,  how  would,  who  would. 

THE   DOT-LINES. 

1 6.  The  horizontal  dot-line,  given  in  connection  with  some 
of  the  phrase-signs,  represents  the  line  of  writing,  or  the  rul- 
ing of  writing-paper.      As  such  a  line,  if  it  appeared  with 
each   outline,  would  interfere  with  its  clearness,  and   would 
tend  to  create  confusion,  it  has  been  omitted  except  where  it 
was  actually  needed.     Generally  the  first  time  a  word  is  intro- 
duced as  the  initial   one  of  a  phrase,  the  dot-line  is  given, 
so  that   the   position   of  any    subsequent    phrase    beginning 
with  that  word  may  be  ascertained  by  referring  back  to  it. 
Thus,  to  determine  how  to  write,  as  regards  position,  the 
phrase  after  I  saic  him  there,  look  back  to  after  a,  by  which 
it  will  be  shown  that  after,  as  the  commencing  word  of  a 
phrase,  should  rest  on  the  line. 

17.  In  order,  however,  that  such  reference  back,  to  ascer- 
tain the  positions  of  words,  may  be  as  convenient  and  speedy 
as  possible,  the  dot  line  is  given  with  the  phrase-sign  at  the 
top  of  each  column  of  the  List. 

HEAVY   FACE    LETTERS. 

1 8.  When  a  word  in  the  List  is  printed  in  heavy  or  black 
face  letters,  it  is  a  mark  of  reference,  and  means  that  under 
that  word,  in  its  proper  alphabetic  place,  other  phrase?  are 
given  that  may  be  joined  to  the  phrase-sign  that  terminates 
with  the  reference   word.     Take,   for  instance,    the  phrase 
how  long  after — by  turning  to  the  word  after  we  get  such 
additional  phrases  as  how  long  after  a,  how  long  after  he,  how 
long  after  the  time,  etc. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   EXAMPLES. 

19.  All  of  the  EXAMPLES  cited  in  this  Introduction,  and 
in  subsequent  portions  of  the  book,  not  enclosed  in  brackets, 
thus — [before  and],  are  taken  from  the  List;  and  it  is  in- 
tended that  each  one  cf  them  shall  be  referred  to  and  care-' 
fully  studied,  in  connection  with  the  rule  or  principle  which 
it  illustrates.     The  phrases  in  brackets  are  not  to  be  found 
in  the  List,  but  are  inserted  as  illustrations,  to  be  formed  in 
accordance  with  the  rules  under  which  they  are  given. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         121 

BALANCED  PHRASE-SIGNS. 

20.  In  the  Preface  to  the  Dictionary  of  Practical  Phonog- 
raphy (.page  xxii.),  brief  mention  is  made  of  the  principles 
of  Motion-balance,  as  exemplified  in  certain  word-outlines. 
The  same  principles  apply,  if  possible,  with  even   greater 
force  to  many  of  the  phrase-outlines  of  this  system  of  pho- 
nography. 

21.  If  the  writer  is  able  to  make  quickly  and  with  precis- 
ion,  and   without  special  effort,  a   phrase-sign    of  several 
stems,  struck  in  various  directions,  it  is  because  the  different 
hand-movements  balance  one  against  the  other,  so  as  to  ex- 
ert a  restraining  or  controlling  influence  that  prevents  any 
one  stroke  from  going  astray.     It  is  greatly  owing  to  this 
balancing  of  hand-movements  that  stem-signs  are  quite  fre- 
quently written  more  quickly  than  tick-signs. 

EXAMPLES  :  —  Did  you  sign  your  name,  did  you  sign  your 
own  name,  he  may  have  done  so.  how  do  you  manage,  how 
long  have  you  been  there,  how  long  have  you  been  in  this 
country,  I  am  sure  there  was  not,  I  suppose  so,  in  the  win- 
ter time,  in  your  opinion,  in  your  own  name,  once  in  a  great 
while,  it  is  quite  clear,  it  seems  to  have  been,  very  great 
extent,  very  soon  thereafter,  what  else  was  said  or  done 
there. 

DIFFICULT   JUNCTIONS. 

22.  It  is  better  generally  to  disjoin  than  to  make  phrase- 
outlines   that   contain    difficult  junctions.     But   occasionally 
speed  is  gained,  and  legibility  not  impaired,  by  including  in 
a  phrase-sign  stems  whose  junctions  require  a  little  extra  care 
in  the  writing. 

EXAMPLES  :— Little  while  after,  long  while  after,  that  will  be. 

23.  Occasionally  when    a    phrase    that    contains    slanting 
stems,  extends  an  unusual  distance  below  the  line,  the  defect 
may  be  partially  remedied  by  giving  the  inclined  part  of  the 
outline  an  unusual  slant. 

EXAMPLES  : — Any  part  of  their,  days  afterward,  depend  upon 
thr,  for  the  purpose  of  their  own,  took  charge  of  their. 

SPEED    PRACTICE. 

24.  Besides  their  regular  practice  upon  the  phrase-signs  of 
the  List  generally,  learners  should  select,  each  for  his -own 
special  drill,  such  outlines  as  to  him  seem  unusually  difficult. 


122         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

For  it  must  always  be  borne  in  mind  that,  before  one  can 
write  phonography  at  a  high  speed  and  with  ease,  he  must, 
from  study  and  persevering  practice,  have  become  so  familiar 
with  the  outlines  of  words  and  phrases,  that  the  hand  carries, 
out  the  intention,  without  requiring  any  special  mental  effort 
to  be  directed  to  the  mere  mechanical  execution  of  the  work. 

SPECIALTY   PHRASES. 

25.  Quite   a  large  number  of  very  useful  phrases,  to  be 
employed  in  special  branches  of  shorthand  work,  are  given 
in  the  List,  of  which  the  following  are  illustrations : 

EXAMPLES  : 

Legislative:—  At  the  last  session,  at  the  next  session,  last 
session,  legislative  session,  read  the  second  time,  read  the 
third  time,  recent  session,  Senate  resolution,  short  session, 
special  session,  Ways  and  Means. 

Church: — Almighty  Father,  Catholic  Bishop,  Child  of  God, 
Children  of  Israel,  Christian  brother,  Church  and  State, 
Church  of  England,  Church  of  God,  Church  of  Koine,  Epis- 
copal Church,  eternal  life,  future  state,  Holy  Ghost,  Lord  and 
Saviour  Jesus  Christ,  Methodist  Church,  New  Testament, 
Old  and  New  Testament,  Old  Testament,  Presbyterian  Church, 
St.  Paul,  St.  Peter,  Saviour  of  the  World,  Spirit-World,  Sun- 
day School,  True  God,  words  of  my  text. 

Land  office  : — Northeast  quarter,  northwest  quarter,  south- 
west quarter,  quarter  section. 

TWO  SIGNS   FOR   ONE   PHRASE. 

26.  In  a  number   of  instances,  two    phrase-outlines  are 
given  for  a  single  phrase.     This  is  done  in  connection  with 
phrases  where  there  is  some  doubt  as  to  which  of  two  forms 
is  the  best ;  and  also  in  the?  case  of  very  brief  outlines  that 
might  not  be  quite  as  legible,  especially  in  matter  that  is 
unusually  technical,    involved   or   intricate,   as   the   longer 
forms. 

PHRASES  CONTAINING    LAW    AND    OTHER  1'ECULIAR  TERMS. 

27.  A  considerable  number,  also,  of  phrases  are  given, 
that  are  made  up,  in  whole  or  in  part,  of  words  and  expres- 
sions peculiar  to  the  Law,  and  of  Latin  and  French  terms  in 
common  use.     The  reporter  will  rind  these  ^ery  useful  in 
his  practice  ;  for,  once  having  become  familiar  with  them  as 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         123 

well  as  their  signs  in  the  List,  he  will  be  prepared,  when 
they  are  suddenly  sprung  upon  him  while  taking  notes,  to 
record  them  accurately  and  with  intelligence. 

28.  In  order  that  the  phonographer's  means  of  informa- 
tion on  this  point  may  be  complete — and  especially  for'the 
convenience  of  those  who  reside  at  a  distance  from  Courts 
and  public  libraries — a  separate  list  of  these  phrases,  with 
their  definitions,  is  given  at  the  end  of  the  book. 

WORD-FORMS   CHANGED   IN   PHRASES. 

29.  Sometimes,  when  incorporated  in  phrase-signs,  for  the 
purpose  of  securing  easy  junctions,  words  are  written  with  out- 
lines that  would  not  be  safe  or  allowable  if  they  were  standing 
alone.     Such  changed  outlines  are  generally  mere  variations 
of  the  full  consonant  word  forms;     but  sometimes  they  are 
abbreviations  adapted  specially  to  the  .phrase  or  phrases  in 
which  they  occur. 

EXAMPLES: — After  business  hours,  any  statement,  can  you 
state,  eternal  life,  for  instance,  for  the  purpose,  in  full,  in  like, 
in  March,  it  appears,  learned  counsel,  look  like,  must  tell, 
North  America,  party  of  the  first  part,  Presbyterian  Church.  Sen- 
ate resolution,  stand  still,  what  do  you  mean  to  be  understood. 

30.  Several  other.similar  words  are  more  fully  explained  in 
the  alphabetic  list  further  on. 

LOOP  SIGNS. 

31.  The  use  in  phrases  of  the  loop-signs— both  detached 
and  joined — to  represent  words,  is  peculiar  to,  and  is  one  of 
the  important  features  of  improvement  of,  Practical  Phonog- 
raphy. 

EXAMPLES  : — As  it,  as  it  is,  as  it  were,  as  long  as  there  is,  as 
the,  as  to,  as  well  as  their,  has  therefore,  is  it,  is  it  as  the,  is 
there,  or  is  there,  business  there,  unless  there,  [book  store, 
shoe  store]. 

FROM  SIGNS  TO  PHRASES. 

32.  The  various  hooks,  modifications,  circles,  etc.,  of  Prac- 
tical  Phonography,  me  used  in   phrase- writing  to  represent 
words,  as  indicated  by  the  following  statement : 

'  THE    INIT'AL    HOOKS. 

33.  L-hook. — The  /-hook  is  used  to  write  all  or  id/'. 
EXAMPLES.;  —  At  all,  it  will,  for  all,  you  will. 


124        PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

34.  R-hook.— The  r-hook  is  used  to  write  are,  our,  or 
or. 

EXAMPLES:— What  are,  they  are,  by  our,  can  our,  at  or,  on 
our,  in  or. 

35.  Way-hook. — The  Way-hook  is  used  to  write  w* 
EXAMPLES  : — But  we,  ought  we,  can  we,  do  we. 

36.  The  Way-hook  is  also  used  in  combination  with  the 
n-hook  and  the  s  and  ens  circles,  to  write  one,  icas  and  once. 

EXAMPLES: — At  one,  each  one,  where  one,  it  was,  what 
was,  at  once. 

37.  Yay-hook. — The  Yay-hook  is  used  to  write  you  or 
your. 

EXAMPLES: — At  your,  can  your,  what  you-r,  which  you, 
did  you. 

THE   FINAL   HOOKS. 

38.  F  or  V  hOOk.— The  /  or  v  hook  is  used  to  write 
hare  or  of. 

EXAMPLES  : — Could  have,  to  have,  out  of,  we  have,  they 
have,  know  of. 

39.  N-hook. — The  n-hook  is  used  to  write  an,  and,  own, 
been,  titan  or  one. 

EXAMPLES  : — At  an,  for  an,  what  an,  of  an,  you  and,  your 
own,  our  own,  have  been,  more  than,  every  one,  some  one. 

40.  A  small  n-hook  turned  on  the  inside  of  the  <er-hook, 
and  of  the  u-hook  on  curves,  is  also  used  to  write  been,  than 
or  own. 

EXAMPLES  : — They  have  been,  better  than,  but  their  own, 
we  have  been,  rather  than,  had  there  been. 

41.  Ther-hook. — The  tker-hook  is  used  to  write  there, 
their,  other  or  they  are. 

EXAMPLES: — Can  there,  do  their,  which  thr,  each  other, 
were  there,  to  their,  at  their,  by  thr. 

THE   MODIFICATIONS. 

42.  Lengthening  Principle.— The  Lenijlhening  Prin- 
(ipl'J,  applied  to  all  curved  stems,  and  to  straight  steins  with 
final-hooks,  is  used  to  write  there,  their,  other  or  they  are. 

EXAMPLES: — Have  thr,  in  their,  if  thr,  if  they  are,  in  other, 
done  there,  before  thr,  been  thr,  had  he  been  there,  have  been 
there,  than  thr. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         125 

43.  The  Lengthening  Principle,  in  combination  with   the 
/-hook  is  also  used  to  write  after. 

EXAMPLES  : — Day  after,  before  or  after,  year  after  year, 
week  after,  Monday  afternoon,  etc. 

44.  The  Lengthening  Principle,  in   combination    with   the 
n-hook,  is  also  used  to  write  another. 

EXAMPLES  :— By  another,  at  another,  if  another,  him  an- 
other, from  another,  with  another,  in  another  of  another,  on 
another,  should  another. 

45.  Halving  Principle.  —  The  Halving  Principle  is 
used  to  write  the,  it,  had  or  to. 

EXAMPLES  :— At  the,  to  the,  on  the,  of  the,  of  it,  were  it 
he  had,  we  had,  you  had,  able  to,  ought  to,  so  to  speak. 

46.  The  Halving  Principle,  in  combination  with  the  n-hook, 
is  used  to  write  not. 

EXAMPLES  :  —  Be  not,  I  cannot,  I  could  not,  will  not,  ought 
not,  may  not,  were  not. 

47.  The  Halving  Principle,  in  combination  with  the  s-cir- 
cle,  is  used  to  write  its. 

EXAMPLES  : — By  its,  of  its,  on  its,  when  its. 

THE   CIRCLES. 

48.  Small  Circle. — The  s-circle   is  used  to   write   as, 
}ian,  IK,  his,  or  us. 

EXAMPLES: — As  a  rule,  as  good  as,  as  far  as,  as  fast  as, 
but  as,  in  as  much  as. 

49.-  A  loop  at  the  end  of  a  word  may  frequently  be 
changed  to  an  s-circle,  when  necessary  to  secure  an  easy 
junction  with  the  succeeding  woid. 

EXAMPLES: — First  rate,  first  time,  for  the  last  time,  must 
have,  next  time. 

50.  Large  Circle. — The  ss-circle  is  used  to   write   as 
his,  as  is,  as  has,  Jtns  as,  1ms  his,  h's  is,  is  as,  or  Tiis  i*. 

51.  The  large  circle  is  also  used  to  combine  the  s-circle 
words  with  the  s-circle  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  words. 

EXAMPLES  : — As  soon  as,  as  such,  it  is  said,  this  has  been. 

52.  It  is  also  occasionally  employed  to  write   two  words, 
the  first  of  which  ends,  and  the  second  begins  with  an   s  or  z 
sound. 

EXAMPLES  : — It  was  said,  this  speech,  those  circumstances, 
whose  signature,  witness  stand. 


126        PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

THE  LOOPS. 

53.  Small   loop.— The  sMoop  is  used  to  add  to,  it  or  the 
to  the  small  circle. 

EXAMPLES: — How  is  it,  how  is  the,  it  is  the,  that  is  the, 
thinks  the,  what  has  the,  when  is  it,  that  is  to  say,  is  to,  is 
the,  has  it. 

54.  Large  loop. — The    sir-loop  is  used  to  add  there, 
their  or  th?y  are  to  the  small  circle,  and  sometimes  store  to 
stems  with  simple  endings. 

EXAMPLES  : — It  is  thr,  that  is  thr,  thinks  thr,  what  has  thr, 
when  is  thr,  as  there,  is  there  ;  [book  store,  B8-Kstr,  clothing 
store,  Kl-DH2-NGstr]. 

THE   CURLS. 

55.  N-eurl. — The  n-curl  is  used  as  follows: 

a.  Initially,  to  represent  in. 
EXAMPLES  : — In  some,  in  some  cases. 

b.  Finally,  after  the  sir-loop  only,  to  represent  than. 
EXAMPLE  : — Faster  than. 

TICK  SIGNS. 

56.  Tick-signs  are  used  to  represent  a,  an,  and,  he,  I,  the, 
ing-d  and  ing-ihf-. 

EXAMPLES  : — A  man,  about  a,  after  an,  sum  and  substance, 
he  can,  I  am,  under  the,  astonishing  a,  astonishing  the. 

PROXIMITY. 

57.  Proximity  is  used  to  indicate  com,  con,  of  and  of- 
com  or  of  con 

ERIEF    \V    AND    Y. 

58.  Brief-W  is  used  to  represent  ice  and  would.       -   i  l^W 
EXAMPLES  :—  We  ought,  if  we,  it  would,  would  they. 

59.  Brief-y  is  used  to  represent  you  and  your. 
EXAMPLES  : — You  think,  after  you-r,  in  your. 

MODE   OF   WRITING   BRIEF   W    AND   Y. 

60.  When  the  brief  signs  for  w  and  y  are  used  at  the  end  of 
phrases,  brief-ic  is  turned  with  its  opening,  or  hollow  side, 
either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  and  brief  y,  with  its  opening 
either  upwar  1   or  downward,    according  to  which   direction 
gives  the  easiest  junction  with  ihe  preceding  stem. 

61.  Thus,  when  joined  finally  to  stems  with  simple  termina- 
tions— that  is  without  final  hooks,  circles,  or  loops — • 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE  BOOK.         127 

a.  Brief-ic  is  turned  with  its  opening  to  the  right,  after  the 
stems  Pee,  Bee,  Kay,  Gay,  Ef,  Vee,  Ith,  Dhee,  Em,  En,  Ing, 
Lee,  El,  Ree,  Yay  and  Hay;  to  the  left,  after  the  stems  Chay, 
Jay,  Ess,  Zee,  I.-h,  Zhee,  Er  and  Way;  and  either  to  the  right 
or  left,  after  the  stems  Tee  and  Dee — preference  being  given  to 
the  latter  direction. 

6.  Brief-y  is  turned  with  its  opening  downward,  after  the 
stems  Pee,  Bee,  Tee,  Dee,  Chay,  Jay.  Ith,  Dhee,  Ess,  Zee, 
Em,  Lee,  El,  Er,  Way,  Yay  and  Hay;  upward  after  the 
.stems  Ef,  Vee,  En,  Ing  and  Ree ;  and  either  downward  or 
upward,  after  tue  stems  Kay  and  Gay— preference  being 
given  to  the  latter  direction 

EXAMPLES  ;— After  we,  ever  we,  how  will  we,  I  believe 
we,  may  we,  that  we,  what  were  we,  where  were  we,  yet  we, 
you  would,  what  would,  when  would,  why  we,  shall  we,  about 
you,  from  you,  how  you,  I  believe  you,  may  you,  or  you, 
tell  you,  thank  you,  that  you,  when  you-r,  whether  you-r,  yet 
you,  will  you,  with  you,  you  say  you,  after  you,  among  you-r, 
ask  you,  ever  you,  for  you,  have  you,  I  beg  you,  if  you-r,  in 
your,  what  were  you. 

62.  When  a  brief  w  or  y  is  written  between  two  stems,  it 
should  be  turned  so  as  to  make  the  best  formed  outline; 
and  in  doing  this,  it  must  be  turned  with  reference  to  a  good 
junction  with  the  stem  that  follows,  rather  than  with  the  one 
that  precedes  it. 

EXAMPLES  :— After  you  were,  have  you  many,  how  long 
have  you  lived,  if  you  must,  when  we  think,  will  you  be. 

63.  When  a  brief  sign  is  joined  to  a  final  hook,  it  is  written 
with  a  movement  similar  to  that  with  which  the  hook  was 
made. 

EXAMPLES  :— Before  you,  out  of  your,  then  you,  then  you 
say,  what  have  you,  what  have  you  been. 

64.  When  a  brief  sign  is  joined  to  a  circle,  it  continues  in 
the  direction  of  the  circle. 

EXAMPLES:— As  far  as  you,  as  long  as  you,  knows  you, 
what  makes  you,  as  soon  as  you,  how  is  your,  so  far  as  you 
know. 

65.  When  a  phrase-sign  is  composed  of  the  stem  Way  and 
brief-io,  or  of  the  stem  Yay  and  brief-?/,  it  is  better  in  all  cases 
to  write  the  stem-sign  first, 

EXAMPLES  :— We  would,  would  we,  yet  you-r,  [you  your]. 


128         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 


FROM  WORDS  TO  PHRASES. 

66.  A,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows  : 
Initially — 

By  a  tick  struck  invariably  in  the  direction  of  the  stem  Pse. 

EXAMPLES  : — A  great,  a  most,  a  short  time  ago. 

Finally  and  medially — 

By  a  tick  struck  in  the  direction  of  Pee,  Chay  or  Ree,  ac- 
cording to  which  gives  the  best  junction. 

EXAMPLES: — After  a,  among  a,  and  a,  earn  a,  even  a,  into 
a,  thinks  a,  within  a,  in  a  clear,  in  a  moment,  many  a  man. 

67.  When  the  tick-sign  would  make  an  obtuse  angle  at  the 
junction,  it  is  better  to  disjoin  and  use  the  dot. 

68.  See  Note  under  Ing-a — ing-the. 

69.  A,  an  and  the. — When  standing  alone,  the  articles  a, 
an  and  the   are  written  with  a  light  dot,  and  are  distinguished 
by  writing  them  equi-distant  apart,  placing  an  the  height  of 
the  stem  Tee  above  the  line,  a  just  above  the  line,  and  the  a 
little  below  the  line. 

70.  So  far  as  the  articles  a  and  an  themselves  are  concerned, 
there  would  be  no  danger  of  confusion  if  both  were  written 
in  the  same  position;  but  as  a  always  indicates  that  the  next 
word  begins  with  a  consonant-sound,  and  an  that  it  begins 
with  a  vowel,  it  adds  to  certainty  in  reading  to  have  the  signs 
distinguished  as  mentioned  above.     And,  besides,  the  rule  of 
position  is  observed  in  respect  to  them. 

71.  But,  on  the  other  hand,  as  the  and  a  would  be  constantly 
conflicting  if  not  properly  distinguished,  care  should  always  be 
taken  to  distinctly  write  the  below  the  line  and  a  above  the 
line,  even  if  a  should  encroach  a  little  upon  the  place  of  an, 
with  which,  as  we  have  seen,  it  cannot  conflict. 

72.  It  is  because  a  and  an  are  not  liable  to  conflict,  that  we 
may  write  both  with  the  same  tick-sign. 

73.  In  a  few  phrases  of  distinct  individuality,  the  article  a 
may  be  omitted. 

EXAMPLES  : — Once  in  a  great  while,  to  a  certain  extent, 
year  and  a  half. 

74.  Absence,  when  joined  to  a  preceding  word,  should 
always  have  its  initial  vowel  inserted,  to  prevent  its  conflicting 
wiih  business. 

EXAMPLES  : — In  his  absence,  in  his  business. 


PHONOGRAPHIC    PHRASE    BOOK.         129 

75.  After,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 
Initially — 

B'y  the  stem  Fetter. 

EXAMPLES  : — After  a,  after  he  left,  after  me,  after  they  had, 
after  we. 

Finally  and  medially— 

a.  By  the  /-hook  and  Lengthening  Principle  combined. 

EXAMPLES  : — Before  or  after,  day  after  day,  day  after  to- 
morrow, week  after,  week  after  week,  year  after  year. 

6.  By  the  stem  Fetter. 

EXAMPLES  : — Days  after,  just  after,  little  while  after,  long 
time  after,  months  after,  weeks  after. 

76.  All,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  Lee. 

EXAMPLES  : — All  classes,  all  directions,  all  have,  all  our,  all 
such. 

Finally  and  medially— 

a.  By  the  Miook. 

EXAMPLES:— At  all,  by  all,  can  all,  for  all,  that  was  all,  at 
all  events,  by  all  thr. 

6.   By  the  stems  El  and  Lee. 

EXAMPLES  : — After  all,  that  is  about  all,  that  is  all,  we  all. 

77.  The  /-hook  should  seldom  be  used  for  all  after  words  that 
take  the  same  hook  for  icill.     Thus,  the  stem  DHel  is  used 
foiUkey  ioi//)and  them  all,  but  not  for  they  all. 

78.  An,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 
Initially — 

By  a  tick  struck  invariably  in  the  direction  of  the  stem  Pee. 

EXAMPLES  : —[An  alarming,  an  emergency,  an  important, 
an  impression.] 

Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  a  tick  struck  in  the  direction  of  Pee,  Chay  or  Ree, 
according  to  which  gives  the  best  junction. 

EXAMPLES  : — After  an,  miss  an,  is  an,  were  an. 

6.  By  the  n-hook. 

EXAMPLES: — At  an,  by  an,  for  an,  if  an,  of  an,  on  an,  or 
an,  such  an,  half  an  hour. 

79.  And,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows  : 
Initially — 

By  a  tick  struck  invariably  in  the  direction  of  the  stem  Pee. 


13O         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

EXAMPLES  :— And  a,  and  as,  and  as  thr,  and  that,  and  the, 
and  this,  and  yet. 

Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  a  tick  struck  in  the  direction  of  Pee,  Chay  or  Ree, 
according  to  which  gives  the  best  junction. 

EXAMI'LES  :  —  [Before  and],  before   and   behind,  now  and 
then,  [short  and],  short  and  clear,  sum  and  substance. 

b.  By  the  n-hook. 

EXAMPLES  : — Him  and,  that  and,  you  and,  by  and  by,  off 
and  on,  over  and  above,  up  and  down. 

80.  When  and  occurs  between  repeated  words  its  sign  may 
generally  be  omitted. 

EXAMPLES  :— Again  and  again,  for  ever  and  ever,  more  and 
more ,  years  and  years. 

81.  Another,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows: 
Initially — 

By  lengthened  En  in  the  first  position  (Enther1). 
EXAMPLES  : — Another  affair,  another  day,  another  point. 
Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  the  n-hook  and  Lengthening  Principle  combined. 
EXAMPLES  : — At  another,  but  another,  in  another,  of  another, 

such  another,  at  another  time,  in  another  manner. 

b.  Occasionally  by  lengthened  En. 
EXAMPLES  : — Before  another,  I  have  another. 

82.  Another— any  other— no  other. — The  outlines 
of  another,  any  other  and  no  other  may  be  distinguished  when 
necessary  as  follows:  Another  is  joined  freely  in  phrases  with- 
out vocalization ;  any  other,  is  disjoined  and   written   in  the 
third  position,  and  no  other  may  be  joined  to  a  preceding  word, 
but  the  vowel  6  should  generally  be  inserted. 

EXAMPLES:  — Before  another,  before  any  other,  before  no 
other,  for  no  other  purpose,  they  have  no  other. 

83.  An't.— See  Note  under  Can't. 

84.  Any  body  and  any  one  should  always  be  disjoined 
and  written  in  the  third  position. 

EXAMPLES  :  — Was  there  any  body,  was  there  any  one. 

85.  Any — no. — When  standing  alone  or  commencing  a 
'phrase,  any  is  written  in  the.  third  position,  instead  of  the 

second  position,  so  as  to  avoid  conflict  with  no.  But  when 
joined  to  preceding  words,  of  course,  no  such  distinction  can 
be  shown.  And,  although  there  is  no  rule  covering  all  the 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         isi 

cases,  in  practice  the  following  course  respecting  these  words 
seems  to  be  the  most  natural  : 

a.  After  in — join  any,  but  not  no. 
EXAMPLE  : — In  any  case. 

b.  After  there  is — join  no,  but  not  any. 

EXAMPLES  : — There  is  no,  think  there  is  no,  while  there  is 
no,  yet  there  is  no. 

c.  When  the   context  will  tell   which   word   is  intended, 
either  may  be  joined. 

EXAMPLES  : — More  than  any,  whether  or  no,  yes  or  no. 

86.  The  phrases  any  other  and  no  other,  in  some  respects, 
do  not  come  under  the  same  rules  as  any  and  no.     See  Note 
under  Another— any  other— no  other. 

87.  Any  other.  See  Note  under  Another— any  other 
—no  other. 

88.  Anything   may  be  joined  freely  in   any  part  of  a 
phrase. 

EXAMPLES  : — Anything  about,  did  you  have  anything,  if 
there  is  anything,  was  there  anything  said  or  done  there. 

89.  Are,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  Ree. 

EXAMPLES: — Are   a,  are  all,  are  as,  are  of,  are  the,  are 
there,  are  we,  are  you. 
Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  the  r-hook. 

EXAMPLES: — AH  are,  each  are,  how  are,  such  are,  that 
are,  they  are  able  to,  they  are  not,  we  are  satisfied,  what  are 
you,  where  are  they,  which  are  likely,  why  are  you,  you  are 
acquainted. 

b.  With  preceding   they,  -  by  the  Mr-hook— by  the  length- 
ening principle,  and  by  the  large  loop. 

EXAMPLES: —  For  which  they  are,  so  they  are,  that  they 
are,  think  they  are,  since  they  are,  unless  they  are. 
3.   By  the  stem  Er. 
EXAMPLES: — Than  there  are,  there  are,  those  are. 

90.  Are — were. — When   are   (Ree)    begins    a   phrase, 
and  especially  if  it  have  a  large  initial  hook  (as  in  are  we, 
are  you],  it  should  be   written  decidedly  above  the  line,  so 
that  it  will   not   be  mistaken  under  any  circumstances  for 
were.      An    additional  safeguard  against   the  confusion   of 


132        PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

these  words  may  be  had  by  writing  the  were  signs  so  that 
they  will  lap  a  little  down  over  the  line. 

91.  These  suggestions  in  regard  to  are  and  were  are  in- 
tended for  writers  who  find  it  difficult  to  strike  at  all  times 
the  exact  position  ot  outlines.     Those  who  write  with  pre- 
cision will  have  no  need  of  a  greater  distinction  than  the 
simple  difference  between  the  first  and  second  positions, 
without  any  exaggeration  of  them. 

92.  Are,  joined  to  a  preceding  word,  must  never  be  writ- 
ten with  Ree,  because  it  will  conflict  with  were.     See   Note 
under  Were 

93.  As,  either  alone  or  in  phrases,  is  generally  written 
with  the  s-circle. 

EXAMPLES  : — As  early  as,  as  far  as,  as  fast  as,  as  for,  as 
long  as,  as  much,  but  as,  do  as.  or  as,  such  as. 

94.  Sometimes,  however,  as  is  included  in  a  large  circle 
or  in  a  loop. 

EXAMPLES  : — And  as  there  has,  as  has,  as  is  usual,  as  it 
were,  as  long  as  it,  as  long  as  thr,  as  such. 

95.  At  the  beginning  of  phrases,  as  follows  the  position  of 
the  second  word,  if  it  has  a  stem  outline. 

EXAMPLES  :  — As  did,  as  do,  as  for,  as  if,  as  good  as,  as 
great,  as  long  as,  as  soon  as. 

96.  But  if  the  phrase-outline  has  no  stem-sign,  as,  following 
the  general  rule,  is  written  in  the  first  position.     See  Note 
under  Is. 

EXAMPLES  : — As  has,  as  his,  as  I,  as  is,  as  it,  as  the,  as  to, 
[as  thr]. 

97.  At  some  time — at  the  same  time.— It  is  well 
to  write   the  word  at,  in  the  first  of  these  phrases,  a  little 
longer  than  the.  stem  Tee,  and  at  the  in  the  second,  quite 
short,  so  lhat,  in  rapid  writing,  the  phrases  will  never  con- 
flict. 

98.  Autumn — time. — See    Note,    under  Time— au- 
tumn. 

99.  Bank  note— bank  account.— The  stem  Kay  is 
omitted  from  the  outline  of  bank  note  to  avoid  the  possibility 
of  its  phrase-sign  being  mistaken  for  bank  account. 

100.  Been,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows: 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  Ben3. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         133 

EXAMPLKS  : — Been  a,  been  the,  been  thr. 

Finally  and  medially — 

a    By  the  stem  Ben. 

EXAMPLES: — Had  been  done,  it  has  been  found,  long  has 
been,  ought  to  have  been,  that  had  been,  what  have  you 
been. 

b.  By  the  n-hook  on  stems. 

EXAMPLES: — Have  been,  having  been,  how  long  have  you 
been  in  this  country,  may  not  have  been,  that  has  ever  been. 

c.  By  the  n-hook  turned  on  the  inside  of  large  final  hooks, 
EXAMPLES: — All  have  been,  had  there  been,  may  as  well 

have  been,  may  have  been,  or  have  been,  should  never  have 
been,  that  have  been,  we  have  been. 

101.  Belong— believe. — When  belong  is  joined  to  a  pre- 
ceding stem  it  should  be  written  in  full,  because  its  abbrevia- 
tion (Bel),  in  such  case,  would  conflict  with  believe. 

EXAMPLES  : — Do  you  belong,  do  you  believe. 

102.  Bill,  in  phrases,  may  be  written  with  either  Bee-El 
or  Bee-Lee,  according  to  which  makes  the  most  convenient 
outline. 

EXAMPLES  : — Bill  of  Exchange,  bill  of  particulars,  bill  of 
sale. 

103    And  occasionally  the  stem  Bel  may  be  used. 

EXAMPLE: — True  bill. 

104,  Can — could. —  Can  may  be  joined  freely  in  any  part 
of  a  phrase.  But  could,  written  with  Us  abbreviation  (Kay), 
should  never  be  joined  except  when  it  commences  a  phrase, 
or  when  it  immediately  follows  a  tick  or  brief  ic  or  y  si«n. 
which  begins  the  phrase.  If  written  with  the  stem  Ked,  could 
may  occasionally  be  joined  with  advantage  to  a  preceding 
stem. 

EXAMPLES: — Can  all,  can  be  seen,  can  ever,  can  have,  can 
never,  can  there  be,  he  can,  he  con  not,  I  can,  it  can  be  said, 
we  can,  what  can  it. 

He  could,  1  could,  we  could,  we  could  not  remember,  you 
could,  you  could  have,  you  could  state,  who  could. 

105  Can't — couldn't—  didn't — don't— hadn't — 
haven't— shouldn't — an't. — Can't,  couldn't,  didrit.  don't, 
hadn't,  haven't  and  shouldn't,  abbreviated  forms  of  the  expres- 
sions can  not,  could  not,  did  not,  do  not,  had  not,  have  not  and 
should  not  respectively,  though  seldom  used  in  dignified  and 


134         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

formal  delivery,  are  very  frequently  met  with  in  colloquial 
speech.  They  are  heard  constantly  in  the  examination  of 
witnesses,  and  even  judges,  either  from  catching  the  contagion, 
or  from  attempting  to  make  themselves  more  easily  under- 
stood by  the  use  of  simple  or  homely  language,  introduce  them 
in  their  charges  to  juries. 

106.  Yet  in  phonography,  although  it  might  be  done,  it  is 
i.ot  found  convenient  in  practice  to  distinguish,  by  difference 
of  outline,  between  the  full  and  the  contracted  forms  of  these 
words ;  and  can  not  and  can't  are  both  written  with  the  stem 
Kent1,  could  not  and  couldn't  with  Kent3,  etc.;  it  being  left 
to  the   memory  or  the   judgment    of    the    writer    to   after- 
wards determine  which  form  of  expression  was  actually  em- 
ployed. 

107.  However,  from  careful  observation  of  the  usage,  in 
this  respect,  of  public  speakers,  and  especially  of  witnesses  and 
examining  counsel  in  court,  the  following  general  conclusions 
have  been  arrived  at : 

a.  The  abbreviations  can't,  couldn't,  etc.,  are  more  com- 
monly used  in  the  taking  of  testimony  than  in  set  speeches. 

b  In  questions  and  answers  they  are  generally  used  at  the 
beginning  of  sentences,  or  at  least  when  other  words  follow  in 
the  same  sentence. 

c.  Standing  alone,  or  at  the  end  of  .sentences,  the  full 
forms,  can  not,  could  not,  etc.,  are  more  generally  heard. 

EXAMPLES  : — Q.  Cunt  you  narrate  the  conversation  ?  A.  I 
cannot.  Q-  Ifyoucan'i  give  the  words,  then  give  the  sub- 
stance. A.  I  couldn't  answer  your  former  question,  and  I 
can  t  answer  this.  Q.  Tell  me  if  you  didn't  have  another  in- 
terview with  the  defendant  ?  A.  I  did  not  The  reason  I 
didn't  have  a  second  interview  was  because  I  hadn'tan  oppor- 
tunity. Q.  Should  you  think  you  were  called  upon  to  interfere  ? 
A*  I  should  not.  Under  such  circumstances  I  sfiouldrit  think 
any  one  would  be. 

108.  The  foregoing  statement  is  by  no  means  an  infallible 
guide  in  regard  to  the  use  or  non-use  of  these  abbreviations. 
In  very  rapid  and  excited  examinations,  and  especially  if  the 
manner  is  angry  or  petulant,  they  are  almost  always  employed. 
Therefore,  if  the   writer   desires   to  make  a  distinction  be- 
tween the  two  forms,  it   may   be  done,  not  by  changing  the 
outlines,  but  by  using  the  apostrophe,  as  is  done  in  ordinary 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE    BOOK.         135 

print,  in  connection  with  the  abbreviations,  but  placing  it 
under  instead  of  over  the  characters. 

109.  Occasionally  the  reporter  hears  the  expression  aril,  a 
colloquial  contraction  of  am  not,  or  are  not,  as  in  the  phrases 
I  an't,  we  an't,  and  by  analogy,  of  is  not  in  he  aril.  As  this 
contraction  has  lost  all  phonetic  connection  with  its  originals, 
it  is  written  as  an  independent  word,  with  the  stem  Net  vocal- 
ized with  a. 

no.  Charge — Change. —  Charge,  written  with  its  ab- 
breviation (Chay),  may  be  joined  in  any  part  of  a  phrase. 
Bi;t  change,  when  joined  to  a  preceding  stem,  should  be  writ- 
ten with  its  full  outline  (CH-N-J). 

EXAMPLES  : — Charge  of  anything,  to  charge,  took  charge, 
took  charge  of  their. 

1.11.  Com  — COn. — In  this  List  all  phrases  commencing 
with  either  com-  or  con-  have  the  dot-sign  inserted,  but,  in 
practice,  when  the  phrase  does  not  begin  a  paragraph,  line  or 
sentence,  the  dot  is  generally  ommitted  and  the  prefix  indi- 
cated by  writing  the  rest  of  the  outline  near  the  outline  of  the 
next  preceding  word.  This  is  called  "Indication  by  Proximity." 

EXAMPLES  : — In  communication,  in  conclusion,  be  consist- 
ent. 

112.  In   a  few  instances  the  prefix  is  neither  written  nor 
indicated,  the  rest  of  the  outline  being  joined  to  the  preceding 
word. 

EXAMPLES  : — In  consequence,  in  consideration,  on  the  con- 
trary. 

113.  if  the  next  preceding  wore!  is  of,  itself  indicated  by 
proximity,  the  dot-sign  for  corn-  or  con-  is  used. 

EXAMPLE  : — Mode  of  combination. 

114.  In  practice,  however,   the  dot   may   with   safety   be 
omitted,  even  in  such  cases — both  o/and  com-  (or  con-)  being 
indicated  by  the  same  proximity. 

115.  If  the  next  preceding  word  is  to  or  too,  in  most  cases 
the   remainder  of  the   outline,   from   which   com  or   con   is 
omitted,  may  be  written  in  the  fourth  position  to  indicate  the 
to  or         and  close  to  the  outline  of  the  word  preceding  the  to 
or  too,  to  indicate  the  com-,  etc. ;  as   in  the  sentences,  "  He 
asked  them   to  complain  "—II3   S^Kt  Dili  Pin4;    "They 
were  ready   to  combine" — DH--R  R2-D:Bn4  ;  "That  evi- 
dence was  too  conflicting"  —  DH1  Vds-Ns  Z^FH-K-T-NG. 


136         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.' 

lib.  Could.— See  note  under  Can— could. 

117.  Couldn't. — See  Note  under  Can't. 

118.  Date — day. — The  outline  for  dale  should  always  be 
made  quite   short,  so  that  it  will  never  be  mistaken  for  the 
word  day. 

EXAMPLES  : — On  the  date,  on  the  day,  this  date,  this  day. 

119.  Did. — See  note  under  Had — do — did. 

1 20.  Didn't. — See  Note  under  Can;t. 
121.'  Do.— See  note  under  Had — do — did. 

122.  Don't.— See  Note  under  Can't. 

123.  Else — less. — Where  standing  alone  else  is  vocalized 
to  distinguish  it  from  less.     But  in  phrases  the  words  are 
distinguished,  where  necessary,  by  writing  else  downward  and 
less  upward. 

EXAMPLES: — Anything  else — anything  less,  little  else — 
little  less,  nothing  else — nothing  less. 

124.  Ever — have. —  Ever  (except  as  a  suffix)  is  always 
written  with  its  abbreviation,  the  stem  Vee.     It  cannot   be 
written  with  the  v-hook  without  danger  of  its  conflicting  with 
have. 

EXAMPLES  .-—Did  he  ever — did  he  have,  do  you  ever— do 
you  have,  more  than  ever,  was  he  ever,  we  ever — we  have, 
you  ever — you  have. 

125.  Extent,  joined  to  a  preceding  stem,  may  generally 
be  abbreviated  to  Stent. 

EXAMPLES  : — Certain  extent,  to  a  certain  extent,  very  great 
extent. 

126.  Far. — The  usual' sign  (or  far,  in  phrases,  is  its  dic- 
tionary form,  Ef-Er;  but  occasionally  the  stem  Fer  is  used, 
as  being  more  convenient. 

EXAMPLES  : — As  far  as,  as  far  as  they,  so  far  as. 

127.  Foxind — find.— If  these  words,  unvocalized,  were 
written  in  the  same  position,  they  would   frequently  conflict. 
Therefore,  although  the  diphthong  of  each  belongs  to  the  first 
place,  found   is   arbitrarily   assigned   to   the   third   position. 
Found  should  not  be  joined  to  a  preceding  stem  ;  except  that 
after  have  it  may  be  so  joined. 

EXAMPLES: — I  find— I  found,  we  find — we  found,  you  find 
— you  found,  I  have  found. 

128.  From — to.— When  from  is  followed  by  a  word  that 
is  repeated  with  only  the  preposition  to  intervening,  both/rom 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.          1.37 

and  to  may  be  omitted,  and  the  two  forms  of  the  repeated 
word  written  close  together  to  represent  the  entire  phrase. 

EXAMPLES: — From  day  to  day,  from  hour  to  hour,  from 
place  to  place,  from  week  to  week. 

129.  Occasionally  the  forms  of  the  repeated  word  are  joined 
together. 

EXAMPLES: — From  generation  to  generation,  from  house  to 
house,  from  time  to  time. 

130.  Give. — When  give  is  joined  to  a  preceding  stem,  or 
is  written  in  the  fourth  position,  it  should  have  its  vowel  i  in- 
serted. 

EXAMPLES: — Did  you  give,  [to  give]. 

131.  Had,  in  phrases,  is  written  both  with  the  stem  Dee 
and  with  the  Halving  Principle. 

EXAMPLES  : — Had  a,  had  the,  had  thr,  had  we,  had  had, 
have  had,  he  had,  I  had,  there  had. 

132.  Had — do — did. — Had   and  do  (both  written    with 
the  stem  Dee)  may  be  joined  freely  in  any  part  of  a  phrase. 
Though,  if  any  conflict  should  arise,  do  should  be  disjoined 
rather  than  had.     But  did,  written  with  its  abbreviation  (Dee), 
should  never  be  joined  except  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase,  or 
when  it  immediately  follows  a  tick  or  brief  w  or  y  sign,  which 
commences  the  phrase.     If  written  with  the  stem  Ded,  did 
may  occasionally  be  joined  with   advantage  to  a  preceding 
stem. 

EXAMPLES:  —  Had  a,  had  been,  had  or  not,  had  we  gone 
there,  he  may  have  had ;  do  believe,  do  these,  do  we  do,  how 
do  you  do,  I  can  do,  it  will  not  do,  what  do  you,  what  had  you, 
when  do  you  (or  had  you);  what  did  you;  they  did,  where 
did  you. 

133.  Hadn't.— See  Note  under  Can't. 

134.  Has,  either  alone  or  in  phrases,  is  generally  written 
with  the  s-circle. 

EXAMPLES  : — Has  a,  has  done,  has  not ;  he  has,  it  has. 

135.  Sometimes,  however,  has  is  included  in  a  large  circle 
or  in  a  loop. 

EXAMPLES  : — Has  his,  has  it  not,  has  thr,  has  to,  he  has 
said,  this  has,  this  has  been. 

136.  Have,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  Vee. 


138        PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

EXAMPLES  : — Have  a,  have  an,  have  another,  have  done, 
have  seen,  have  the,  have  thr. 
Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  the  u-hook. 

.  EXAMPLES  : — Can  have,  he  have,  I  have,  to  have,  should 
have,  we  have,  you  have,  can  have  their,  did  you  have  any- 
thing to  say,  I  have  seen,  you  have  noticed. 

b.  'Occasionally  by  the  stem  Vee. 

EXAMPLES  : — Does  he  not  have,  how  long  have,  I  mean  to 
have,  there  may  not  have  been. 

137.  Have  been— have  been  thr.— The  phrase  have 
been,  after  curves,  is  generally  b'est  written  by  the  r-hook 
with  the  ?i-hook  turned  inside.     But  have  been  thr  should  be 
written,  in  such  cases,  by  the  u-hook  and  the  stem  Benthr. 

EXAMPLES  : — May  have  been,  may  have  been  thr,  they 
have  been,  they  have  been  thr. 

138.  But  if  the  stem  Benthr  will  not  join  to  the  u-hook, 
the  hook  should   be  omitted  and  the  words  have  been  thr 
added  by  the  stem  Venthr. 

EXAMPLES  : — Shall  have  been,  shall  have  been  thr,  should 
have  been,  should  have  been  thr. 

139.  Haven't. — See  Note  under  Can't. 

140.  He,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 
Initially — 

a.  Generally  by  the  stem  Hay. 

EXAMPLES  : — He  and,  he  called,  he  had,  he  is  not,  he  was, 
he  was  thr. 

b.  Sometimes  by  a  perpendicular  or  horizontal  tick. 
EXAMPLES: — He  can,  he  cannot,  he  change,  he  could,  he 

do,  he  ever,  he  gfve,  he  ought,  he  shall. 
Finally  and  medially — 

a.  Generally  by  the  stem  Hay. 

EXAMPLES  : — After  he,  did  he,  did  he  ever,  how  long  had 
he  been  there. 

b.  Rarely  by  the  ft-tick. 
EXAMPLES  : — If  he,  if  he  can. 

141.  He-tick. — It  is  possible  to  write  he  with  the  ft-tick 
before  each  of  the  simple  stems  Tee,  Dee,  Chay,  Jay,  Kay, 
Gay,  Ef,  Vee,  Ith,  Dhee,  Ish,  Zhee,  Lee,  El,  Er,  Em,  Way,  Vay 
and   Hay;  but  it  should  be  employed  with  caution.      And 
when  he  is   so  written,  great  care  should  be  taken  to  always 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         13Q 

strike  the  tick  in  an  exactly  horizontal  or  perpendicular  direc- 
tion, so  that  it  will  not  conflict  with  the  tick  for  /. 
EXAMPLES  : — If  he  can,  if  I  can. 

142.  Before  Ish  or  Zhee,  however,  there  is  no  danger  of 
such  conflict,  because  the  ticks  are  written  on  opposite  sides  of 
the  stem. 

EXAMPLES: — He  shall — I  shall;  he  should— I  should,  [he 
usually — I  usually]. 

143.  He'll— I'll— she'll-they'll— we'll-you'll.  - 
These  contractions  for  he  will,  I  will,  etc  ,  which  occur  princi- 
pally in  poetry,  may  be  ma/ked,  when  necessary,  by  placing 
the  apostrophe  over  the  outline  of  the  full  expressions,  he  will, 
I  will,  she  will   etc. 

144.  Him — me. — When  standing  alone,  Aim   is   distin- 
guished from  me  in  two  ways, — by  the  heavier  shading  of  the 
stem  Hay,  and  by  arbitrarily  placing  the  sign  for  him  in  the 
second  position  instead  of  the  third.      But  when  these  words 
are  joined  to  preceding  outlines  the  distinction  by  difference  of 
position  cannot,  of  course,  be  shown.     Therefore  those  writers 
who  are  not  sufficiently  exact  in  their  phonographic  penmanship 
to  be  able  at  all  times  to  make  with  exactness  the  difference  in 
shading  between   the  stems    Em   and    Hay,  should   always 
vocalize  me,  if  they  connect  it  with  the  preceding  ward,  or 
they  should  disjoin  and  write  it  in  the  third  position,  without 
inserting  its  vowel. 

EXAMPLES: — After  him— after  me,  call  me,  she  told  me, 
who  told  him — who  told  me. 

145.  His,  either  alone  or  in  phrases,  is  generally  written 
with  the  s-circle. 

EXAMPLES: — His  own,  above  his,  after  his,  among  all  his, 
of  his  own  accord,  on  his  account,  to  his,  upon  his. 

146.  Sometimes,  however,  hij  is  included  in  a  large  circle 
or  in  a  loop. 

EXAMPLES  ;  — As  his,  does  his,  has  his,  in  his  speech,  is  his, 
since  his. 

147.  I. — The  pronoun  Jis  always  written  with  a  short  tick, 
slanting   invariably  to  the   right,  and  struck   either  upward 
with  the  inclination  of  Ree,  or  downward  with  the  inclination 
of  Chay — according  to  which  direction  gives  the  best  junction 
with  the  stem  to  which  the  tick  is  joined. 


14O         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE    BOOK. 


EXAMPLES: — I  am,  I  do,  I  fail,  I  hope,  I  know,  I  may,  I 
remark,  I  say,  I  shall,  I  think,  I  understand,  I  used,  I  was,  I 
wish,  I  would;  I  agree,  I  believe  that,  I  call,  I  trust;  I  said, 
I  sent,  I  speak,  I  stand;  and  I  am,  and  I  think,  as  I  am,  as  I 
think;  am  I  not,  ever  I,  how  I,  if  I,  that  I,  whether  I;  be- 
cause I,  says  I,  since  I. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

148.  Before  can,  could,  cannot,  and  could  not,  the  upward 
tick  is  used,  although  the  downward  direction  would  give  a 
better  junction.     This  is  done  to  avoid  conflict,  in  rapid  writ- 
ing, between  the  phrases  lean  and  I  am,  I  cannot  and  I i,m 
not,  I  could'not  and  I  mean  to. 

149.  In  such  cases  the  tick  may  be  struck  upward  almost 
perpendicularly,  so  as  to  secure  a  sharper  angle  with  the  Kay. 

EXAMPLES  : — I  can,  I  cannot,  I  could,  I  could  not. 

150.  The  habit  formed,   from    the  frequent   recurrence  of 
these  phrase-forms,  of  writing  I  before  Kay  with  the  upward 
tick,  makes  it  more  convenient  to  extend  the  practice  to  other 
words  whose  outlines  began  with  Kay. 

EXAMPLE  : — I  expect. 

151.  When   standing  alone,  or  only  preceded  by  a  tick  or 
circle,  I  is  always  struck  upward. 

152.  I  have — I  Will. — The  phrase  I  have  is  written  with 
the  downward  tick  and  r-hook,  and  /  wUl  with  the  upward 
tick  and  Z-hook ;  and  if  care  be  taken  to  always  write  the 
downward  form  with  the  slant  of  the  stem  Chev,  and  the  up- 
ward form  with  the  slant  of  the  stem  Reel,  and  to   make  the 
hooks  shorter  than  the  tick  portions,  1  have  and  I  icill  can 
never  conflict. 

153.  But  if  in  rapid  work   the  writer  experiences  any  diffi- 
culty in  making  these  distinctions,  he  may  write  I  have  as 
above  directed,  and  use  the  duplicate  form  of  the  List,  Lee 
with  the  initial  downward   I  tick,  for  /  -will.     If,  however, 
I  icill  is  joined  to  the  stem  that  follows  it,  the  upward  tick 
form  should  be  employed. 

EXAMPLES  : — I  will,  I  will  be,  I  will  have,  I  will  not,  I  will 
not  be. 

CAUTION. 

154.  /must  never  be  written  with  a  tick  slanting  in  the 
direction  of  Pee.     And  particular  care  should  be  had  not  to 
use  the  full  diphthong-sign    v   for  this  pronoun,  because  of  its 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.          141 

too  close  resemblance  to  the  brief-?/  for  you,  in  such  phrases 
as  you  did,  you  do,  you  should,  you  think,  etc. 

155.  I    think  —  until.  —  See   Note    under  Until— I 
think. 

156.  Ill  is  never  joined  in  phrases,  because  of  its  liability 
to  conflict  with  well.     See  Note  under  "Well. 

157.  I'll.— See  Note  under  He'll. 

158.  In,  whether  standing  alone  or  joined  in  phrases,  is 
almost  invariably  written  with  the  stem  En. 

159.  In  a  few  phrases  it  is  written  with  the  n-hook;  but  it 
would  be  unsafe  to  extend  the  practice  beyond  the  illustrations 
found  in  this  List.     It  is  not  intended  as  a  rule. 

EXAMPLES  : — Bear  in  mind,  bearing  in  mind. 

1 60.  In  is  also  sometimes  written  initially  with  the  in-curl. 
EXAMPLES: — In  some,  in  some  respects,  in  some  way. 

161.  In  re-. — Generally,  when  a  word  commencing  with 
re-  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  in,  the  in  and  re  may  be 
written  with  the  stem  Ner3. 

EXAMPLES  ; — In  receipt,  in  regard,  in  return. 
EXCEPTIONS: — In  reference,  in  relating,  in  relation. 

162.  Indeed— no  doubt. — The  \vord  indeed,  if  joined 
unvocahzed  to  a  preceding  stem,  would   frequently   conflict 
with  no  doubt.     It  should,  therefore,  be  either  disjoined  and 
written  in  position,  or,  if  joined,  have  its  final  vowel,  e,  in- 
serted. 

EXAMPLES  : — It  is  indeed,  it  is  no  doubt. 

163.  Informed—  notified.— See  Note  under  Notified 
^informed. 

164.  Ing. — The  final  syllable  -ing  is  written  with  the  dot- 
sign,  instead  of  the  stem  Ing,  in  the  following  cases: 

a.  When  the  stem  Ing  cannot  either  possibly  or  conven- 
iently be  joined  to  the  preceding  stem;   which  is  the  case 
after  certain  half-length  stems,  and  stems  with  final  loops  and 
hooks. 

EXAMPLES  :— (After  half  lengths : )  Biting,  doubting,  hating, 
mating,  putting,  treating,  yachting; — (After  small  loops:) 
Assisting,  casting,  hasting,  misting,  posting,  resting,  vesting, 
wasting; — (After  large  loops:)  Clustering,  fostering,  muster- 
ing;— (After final  hooks:)  Rafting,  roving,  tottering. 

b.  After  abbreviated  outlines  of  words. 


142         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

EXAMPLES: — Advertising,  astonishing,  becoming,  begin- 
ning, believing,  changing,  delivering,  giving. 

165.  The  dot  is   here  used   because   it  does  not  detract 
from  the  individuality  of  the  abbreviation,  which  the  stem  Ing 
would  do. 

1 66.  Ing  a-n— ing  the.— In  all  cases  where  the  final 
syllable  -ing  would  be  written  with  the  dot  (as  explained 
above),  a  or  an  may  be  added  by  changing  the  dot  to  an  in- 
clined tick,  struck  in  the  direction  of  Pee  or  Chay ;  and  the, 
by  changing  the  dot  to  a  perpendicular  or  horizontal  tick. 

EXAMPLKS  : — Becoming  a-n — becoming  the,  beginning  a — 
beginning  the,  changing  a — changing  the,  costing  a — costing 
the,  doubting  a — doubting  the,  feasting  a — feasting  ihe,  hold- 
ing a — holding  the,  mastering  a — mastering  the,  owing  a — 
owing  the,  remembering  a — remembering  the,  referring  a — 
referring  the. 

167.  Is,  either  alone  or  in  phrases,  is  generally  written 
with  the  s-circle. 

EXAMPLES  : — Is  a,  is  done,  is  in,  is  this,  it  is,  that  is,  where 
is,  as  it  is,  as  long  as  it  is,  as  there  is. 

1 68.  But  sometimes  is  is  included  in  a  large  circle  or  in  a 
a  loop. 

EXAMPLES  : — Is  as,  is  his,  is  it,  is  the,  is  there,  is  to,  it  is 
said,  it  is  the,  it  is  therefore,  that  is  thr,  that  is  to. 

169.  At  the  beginning  of  phrases  is  is  always  written  in 
the  third  position.     See  Note  under  As,  Sections  95  and  96. 

170.  It,  in  phrases,  is  written  both  with  the  stem  Tee  and 
with  the  Halving  Principle. 

EXAMPLES: — It  can,  it  is  said,  it  was,  about  it,  be  it,  from 
it,  had  it,  of  it.  . 

171.  Its,  in  phrases,  is  sometimes  written  with  the  Halv- 
ing Principle  and  the  s-circle  combined. 

EXAMPLES:— Among  its,  for  its,  had  its,  if  its,  of  its,  on 
its. 

172.  Keep  —  occupy.  —  See   Note  under  Occupy — 
keep. 

173.  Know— own.— See  Note  under  Own— know. 

174.  Late— old. — See  Note  under  Old — late. 

175.  Lately— little. — When  lately  is  joined  to  a  pre- 
ceding stem,  it  should  always  have  the   vowel  a  inserted,  to 
distinguish  it  from  little.     The   writer  may  choose  between 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         143 

joining  lately  vocalized,  and  disjoining  and  writing  it  in  po- 
sition without  vocalization. 

EXAMPLES: — But  lately,  but  little,  very  lately,  very  little. 

176.  Less— else.— See  Note  under  Else— less. 

177   Little— lately.— See  Note  under  Lately —little. 

178.  Me — him.— See  Note  under  Him— me. 

179.  No  doubt— indeed.— See  Note  under  Indeed 
—no  doubt. 

180    No — any.— See  Note  under  Any— no. 

ti8i.  No— other.— See  Note  under  Another  —  any 
other— no  other. 

182.  Not,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows: 

Initially — 

By  the  stem  Net1. 

EXAMPLES  -.—Not  a,  not  at  that  time,  not  enough,  not  only, 
not  the,  not  to  my  knowledge. 

Finally  and  medially — 

a.  ]>y  the  stem  Net. 

EXAMPLES  :— Are  we  not,  has  it  not,  has  not,  I  have  not,  is 
not,  it  is  not,  that  is  not,  they  have  not. 

b.  By  the  n-hook  and  Halving  Principle  combined. 
EXAMPLES  :— Are  not,  am  not,  can  not,  could  not,  did  not, 

do  not,  had  not,  may  not,  shall  not,  they  are  not,  we  aie  not, 
were  not  would  not,  you  are  not. 

183  In  case,  however,  the  writer  wishes  to  follow  not  with 
another  stem,  which  in  the  particular  instance  cannot  be 
joined  to  the  n-hook,  the  stem  Net  may  be  employed. 

EXAMPLES: — Shall  not,  shall  not  be,  should  not,  should 
not  be.  . 

184.  Not  necessary. — These  words  should  not  be  joined 
together  if  the  not  is  itself  connected  with  a  preceding  stem, 
because  they  would  then  be  liable  to  be  mistaken  for  the  out- 
line  of  the  word  unnecessary.      Thus,  the  phrase  it  is  not 
necessary,  if  written    with   a   continuous  outline,  would   be 
liable  tu  be  read  it  is  unnecessary. 

185.  But  the  words  not  necessary,  standing  by  themselves, 
or  beginning  a  phrase,  may,  of  course,  be  joined. 

186.  Notify— inform.— The  writer  should  always  insert 
the  sign  of  the  diphthong  I  in  notify  and  notified,  to  prevent 
their  being  mistaken  for  inform  and  informed. 

EXAMPLES: — Were  you  notified,  were  you  informed. 


144         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

187.  Occupy — keep. — When  the  word  occupy  is  joined 
to  a  preceding  stem  it  should  always  have  the  diphthong  I 
inserted,  to  prevent  its  conflicting  with  keep. 

EXAMPLES:— Did  you  occupy,  did  you  keep. 

1 88.  Of,  in  phrases,  is  written  or  indicated  as  follows: 
Initially — 

a.  By  the  stem  Vee, 

EXAMPLES  : — Of  a,  of  all,  of  an,  of  another,  of  the,  of  their, 
of  your  own. 

6.  By  proximity — -That  is,  by  omitting  the  sign  for  of,  and 
writing  the  outline  of  the  next  following  word  close  to  that 
of  the  preceding  one. 

EXAMPLES  : — All  of  my,  all  of  our,  burden  of  proof,  Court 
of  Appeals,  loss  of  money. 

189.  Sometimes  both  the  sign  and  the  indication  (proximity) 
are  allowed  to  disappear,  the   outlines  of  the  words  between 
which   of  occurs  being  joined  together ;    leaving  it   to   the 
context  or  sense  to  supply  the  omitted  word. 

EXAMPLES  : — Bill  of  sale,  cause  of  action,  Court  of  Claims, 
'in  point  of  fact,  matter  of  fact,  point  of  view. 

Finally  and  medially — 

a.   By  the  u-hook. 

EXAMPLES  : — Day  of,  each  of,  half  of,  know  of,  law  of  na- 
ture, out  of,  out  of  their  own,  out  of  your,  out  of  your  own, 
part  of.  the.  variety  of  causes. 

6.  Occasionally  by  the  stem  Vee. 

EXAMPLES  : — All  of  the,  all  of  their,  any  one  of  the,  are  you 
sure  of  that,  spoken  of. 

190.  Of  COHL of  COH-. — When  of  is  followed  by  a  word 

that  begins  with  the  prefix  com-  or  con-,  as  in  the  expression 
A  court  of  competent  jurisdiction,  Proximity  may  be  used  to 
indicate  the  of,  and  the  dot-sign  to  represent  the  prefix. 

EXAMPLE  : — Mode  of  combination. 

In  ordinary  practice,  however,  the  dot  may  be  omitted,  and 
Proximity  used  for  both  o/ancl  the  prefix. 

191.  Of  Our. — The  phrase  of  our  is  represented  by  prox- 
imity and  Ree,  because  the  stem  Ver1  in  rapid  writing  is  lia- 
ble to  be  mistaken  for  of  all  (Vel1.) 
CAUTION. 

192.  Inexperienced  phonographers  sometimes  feel  timid 
about  employing  Proximity  for  of,  and  in  its  stead  make  free 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         145 

use  of  the  stem  Vee.  But  by  so  doing  they  make  a  serious 
mistake,  for  they  not  only  lose  materially  in  brevity,  but 
subject  themselves  to  the  constant  danger  of  confounding  of 
with  for. 

193.  Old — late. — These  words,  when  standing  alone,  are 
distinguished  by  writing  the  former  with  Lee  Dee,  and  the 
latter  with  Leet.     But  in  the  three  phrases  old  gentleman,  old 
lady  and  Old  and  New  Testament,  the  half  length  is  used  for 
old. 

194.  On — in. —  On,  because  of  its  liability  to  conflict  with 
in,  is  never  joined  in  phrases  except  at  the  beginning,  where, 
of  course,  it  is  distinguished  by  its  position. 

EXAMPLES  : — Which  were  on,  which  were  in. 

195  Once  may  sometimes  be  written  with  the  Way- 
hook  and  ens  circle  combined. 

EXAMPLES  : — At  once,  [but  once,  where  once]. 

196. — One,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 

Initially — 

By  the  stem  Wen8. 

EXAMPLES  :  — One  after,  one  evening,  one  side  of  the  case. 

Finally  and  medially — 

a    By  the  stem  Wen. 

EXAMPLES  : — Any  one,  no  one,  no  one  else,  not  one,  on  one 
occasions. 

b.  By  the  Way-hook  and  n-hook  combined. 

EXAMPLES  : — At  one,  at  one  time,  each  one,  where  one, 
which  one. 

c.  In  a  few  cases  only — all  of  which  are  given  in  this  List 
— by  the  n-hook. 

EXAMPLES  :— Every  one,  some  one,  some  one  or  other. 

197.  If  it  were  made  a  general  rule  to  write  one  with  the 
n-hook,  it  would  frequently  conflict  with  an. 

198.  One  or  is  written  with  the  outline  Way-Ner. 
EXAMPLES  : — One  or  both,  one  or  more,  one  or  two. 

199.  Or,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  Er. 

EXAMPLES  : — Or  a,  or  another,  or  as  it  is,  or  have  been,  or 
some  such,  or  you. 
Medially — 
By  either  Er  or  Ree,  accord  ing  to  which  is  most  convenient. 


146         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

EXAMPLES  : — Day  or  two,  eight  or  ten,  four  or  five,  greater 
or  less,  had  or  not,  once  or  twice,  said  or  done,  true  or  not. 

Finally  and  medially — 

By  the  r-hook. 

EXAMPLES  : — At  or,  in  or  about,  on  or  before,  two  or  three, 
was  or  was  not,  with  or  without. 

200.  See  Note  under  One  or. 

201.  Other,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows  : 
Initially— 

By  the  stem  DHr1. 

EXAMPLES  : — Other  than,  other  than  that. 
Finally  and  medially — 
o.  By  the  thr-hook. 

EXAMPLES  :—  Each  other,  such  other,  our  other. 
b.  By  the  Lengthening  Principle. 

EXAMPLES  : — Among  other,  any  other,  for  no  other  pur- 
pose, from  all  other. 

202.  Other --their. — If  written  with  the  same   outline 
and  in  the  same  position,  other  and  their  would  frequently 
conflict.     Ic  is  for  this  reason  that,  when  standing  alone,  or 
beginning  a  phrase,  other  is   written  in  a  different  position 
from  tlieir.     But  when  joined  to  preceding  stems  that  mode 
of  distinction  cannot,  of  course,  be  made,  and  resort  must  be 
had  to  some  other. 

203.  The  rule  for  the  writing  and  distinguishing  of  these 
words  is  as  follows : 

a.  The  thr-hook  and  the  Lengthening  Principle,  without 
vocalization,  may  always  be  used  for  their. 

b.  They  may  also  be  used  for  other  in  connections  where 
their  never  or  seldom  is  used,  — as  for  instance,  after  most  ad- 
jectives, and  nouns  and  pronouns  in  the  possessive  case. 

c.  In  cases  where  there  is  liability  of  conflict,  other  may  be 
written  either  (a)  with  the  stem  Dher*  or  (b)  with  the  Mr-hook 


*  The  syllables  Dhee  and  Dher  are  pronounced  the  and  ther.  In  the 
ordinary  spelling  the  digraphs,  or  double  letters,  sh  and  tfi  are  used  to 
represent  the  simple  or  single  consonant  breath  sounds  of  the  words  thin 
and  thin.  But  the  corresponding  sonants  ot  these  sounds  have  no  dis- 
tinctive representation — the  sonini  of  sh  being  written  with  j  in  the  word 
pleasure  and  z  in  azure,  and  that  of  th  with  the  same  sign  \tlt],  as  in 
thine.  Hence,  phoneticians  (or  then  own  convenience,  and  in  order  to  be 
consistent  about  the  representation  of  these  sounds,  have  adopted  the 
digraphs  zk  and  dk  a-,  the  mate>  of  sA  and  th.  to  stand  for  their  sonants. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.          147 

or  Lengthening  Principle,  vocalized  with  the  short  vowel  u  of 
other. 

EXAMPLES: — To  other — to  their,  to  others — to  theirs;  of 
other,  or  other,  [by  other,  Btithr1]. 

204.  Oil",  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows: 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  Ree1. 

EXAMPLES: — Our  own,  our  own  business. 
Finally  and  medially — 
a.   By  the  r-hook. 

s  EXAMPLES: — All  our,  among  our,  at  our  house,  by  our,  in 
our,  on  our  account,  which  our. 
6.  Occasionally  by  the  stem  Ree. 
EXAMPLES  : — As  our,  or  our,  words  of  our  text. 

205.  Own,  in  phrases  is  written  as  follows  : 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  En1 . 

EXAMPLES  : — Own  a,  own  use. 

Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  the  n-hook  on  stems. 

EXAMPLES  : — All  our  own,  among  oui  own,  from  your  own 
knowledge,  our  own,  on  your  own  part,  their  own,  your  own 
note. 

b.  By  the  n-hook  turned  on  the  inside  of  large  final  hooks. 
EXAMPLES  : — At  their  own,  but  their  own,  by  their  own,  do 

their  own. 

c.  By  the  stem  En. 

EXAMPLES  : — Among  all  your  own,  in  his  own,  on  his  own 
behalf,  on  their  own  account. 

206.  Own — know. —  Own,  in  phrases,  should  always  be 
vocalized  when  it  is  liable  to  conflict  with  know,  as  in  the  sen- 
tence, "  Do  you  own  (know?)  the  house  in  question?" 

207.  But  when  there  is  no  danger  of  such  conflict  it  need 
not  be  vocalized. 

EXAMPLES: — For  his  own  account,  my  o'.vn  opinion. 

208.  Part,  when  standing  alone,  is  written  with  the  abbre- 
viation   Pee1.     But  when   joined  to  a  preceding  stem,  it  is~ 
written  with  either  Pee  or  Pret,  according  to  which  makes  the 
easiest  junction. 

EXAMPLES  : — On  my  own  part,  on  my  part,  on  the  one  part, 
on  the  other  part. 


148 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 


"209.  Remember  is  generally  written  with  the  abbreviation 
Er-hm;  but  after  did  you  and  do  you  it  is  contracted  to  Em. 

EXAMPLES  : — Did  you  remember,  do  you  remember 
•whether,  how  do  you  remember. 

210.  Say — See. — The  word  see,  when  joined  as  the  final 
word  of  a  phrase,  should  always  be  vocalized,  to  distinguish  it 
from  say,  which  need  never  be  vocalized. 

EXAMPLES  : — Cannot  say,  cannot  see. 

211.  In  the  middle  of  phrases,  howeve/,  this  precaution  is 
seldom  required. 

EXAMPLE: — Did  you  see  him. 

212.  Says. — Most  witnesses,  in  narrating,  on  the  witness 
stand,  conversations  that  they  have  heard  or  participated  in, 
make   very   free  use  of  the  word  says.     Hence,  it  will  be 
well   for  the  reporter  to  practice  on  the  phrases  under  that 
word  until  they  are  thoroughly  familiarized.     See  Xote  under 

Say— see. 

213.  Send — sent. — These  words  naturally  both  belong  to 
the  second  position;  but  if  they  were  so  written  there  would 
be  no  way  of  distinguishing  them  except  by  writing  send  with 
the  long  outline  sN  D3.     Therefore,  it  is  better   (as  wi'h  the 
word  found)  to  remove  send  to  the  third  position.     Loaned 
[ind3]  may  be  distinguished  from  lent  [int8]  in  the  same  way. 

EXAMPLES  : — I  sent — I  send  [sN<!8]. 

214.  Session,  in  phrases,  is  sometimes  written  with  the 
s- circle  and  shun  curl. 

EXAMPLES: — At  the  next  session,  extra  session,  legislative 
session,  recent  session,  short  session,  special  session. 

215.  The  plural  of  session,  so  written,  is  formed,  of  course, 
by  adding  the  s-circle. 

EXAMPLES  : — Court  of  General  Sessions,  Court  of  Sessions. 

216.  Shall— Should.  —  Shall  may  be  joined  freely  in  any 
part  of  a  phrase.      But  should  is  never  joined  except  when  it 
commences  a  phrase,  or  when  it  immediately  follows  a  tick  or 
brief  w  or  y  sign,  which  begins  the  phrase. 

EXAMPLES: — Shall  a,  shall  all,  shall  do,  shall  not,  shall  the, 
he  shall,  I  shall,  we  shall,  you  shall,  I  think  we  shall,  never 
shall,  that  we  shall  be  able  to;  should  a,  should  another, 
should  go,  should  have  been,  should  the,  should  we  be  ;  he 
should,  I  should,  we  should,  you  should,  you  should  be  there. 

217.  System — society. — When  the  word  system  occurs 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         149 

in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  phrases,  it  is  written  in  full 
(ssTs-M\  to  distinguish  it  from  society. 

EXAMPLES: — Christian  system,  Christian  society. 

218.  Yet,  in  reporting  subject  matter  of  a  special  kind,  in 
which  the  term  system  occurs  frequently,  as  for  instance  a 
medical  lecture,  the  abbreviation  may  be  used  in  any  part  of  a 
phrase. 

EXAMPLE: — Nervous  system. 

219.  Than,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows: 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  DHen1. 

EXAMPLES  : — Than  a,  than  it,  than  otherwise,  than  the,  than 
the  other. 
Finally — 

a.  By  the  n-hook. 

EXAMPLES  :— Easier  than,  larger  than,  longer  than,  more 
than,  other  than,  slower  than. 

b.  By  the  ?<-hook  turned  on  the  inside  of  the  ter-hook. 
EXAMPLES  : — Better  than,  rather  than. 

c.  By  the  n  curl  after  the  large  loop. 

EXAMPLES  : — Faster  than,  [moister  than,  vaster  than]. 
d    Occasionally  by  the  stem  Dlln. 

EXAMPLES: — Less  than,  more  probable  than,  no  less  than, 
shorter  than. 

220.  Thank  the  is  written  with  the  stem  Ith  and  the-dot, 
because  if  half-length  Ith  were  used,  it  would  conflict  with 
thoiujht. 

221.  That — them.—  TJtat  is  sometimes  written  with  its 
abbreviation  (Dhee),  and  sometimes  with  the  stem  Dhet,  as 
follows : 

The  abbreviation  is  used — 

a.  \Vhen  that  either  stands  alone  or  begins  a  phrase. 

EXAMPLES  : — That  a,  that  another,  that  day,  that  has,  that 
have,  that  it,  that  the,  that  therefore. 

6.  When  that  is  preceded  in  the  phrase  only  by  a  circle  or 
loop  word  or  phrase  sign  of  the  first  position,  or  by  a  tick, 
or  by  a  brief  w  or  y  sign. 

EXAMPLES  : — As  that,  as  that  the,  as  that  thr,  [as  to  that], 
has  that,  and  that,  and  that  has  the,  and  that  the,  and  that  thr, 
[would  that,  w-DH1]. 

The  stem  Dhet  is  used— 


iso        PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

Always  when  that  is  joined  to  a  preceding  stem,  or  to  a  cir- 
cle or  loop  word  or  phrase  sign  of  the  third  position. 

EXAMPLES  : — About  that,  after  that,  all  that,  could  that,  in 
thit,  know  that,  on  that,  on  that  day,  that  that,  with  all  that 
that,  is  that,  is  that  true. 

222.  In  other  words,  the  abbreviation  for  that,  in  phrases, 
must  always  be  written  in  the  first  position  ;  and  that  cannot 
be  done  unless  it  is  the  first  stem-sign  of  the  phrase. 

223.  The  reason  for  this  rule  is  that  if   the   abbreviation 
were  joined  to  previous  stems,  that  would  conflict  with  they 
and  them,  the  outlines  of  which  words  are  joined  in  any  part 
of  a  phrase. 

EXAMPLES  : — After  that — after  them,  as  long  as  that — as 
long  as  they,  by  that — by  them,  did  that — did  they,  for  that — • 
for  them,  if  that — if  thtfy. 

224.  After  an  Ess  or  Zee  stem  with  simple  termination, 
that  should  be  made  quite  short  and  thick,  and  with  a  sharp 
curve,  especially  at  the  point  of  junction. 

EXAMPLES  :— I  say  that,  so  that,  was  that. 

225.  The  use  of  the  full  stem  Dhee1,  instead  of  the  half- 
length  Dhet1,  for  that,  well  illustrates  the  principle  which 
guided  the  author  of  Practical  Phonography  in  the  selection  of 
the  Abbreviations  of  the  system ;  namely,  to  adopt,  whenever 
it  was  feasible,  the  simple  consonant-stems  of  the  Alphabet, 
rather  than  any  of  their  modified  forms,  on  account  of  the 
very  much  greater  facility  with  which  they  may  be  moulded 
into  phrase-signs.     If  the  word  that  were  always  written  by 
itself,  the  half-length  Dhet  would  be  its  best  outline.     But,  in 
Phraseography,  Dhet  would  give  us  none  of  the  following 
very  useful  phrase-signs:  That  all,  that  an,  that  and  other, 
that  are,  that  have,  that  it,  that  its,  that  the,  that  thr,  etc. 

226.  The,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 

a.  By  the  Halving  Principle. 

EXAMPLES  : — Among  the,  at  the,  between  the,  by  the,  could 
the,  charge  of  the,  for  the  sake  of  the,  in  the  presence,  longer 
than  the,  where  the,  which  the. 

b.  By  changing  a  preceding  s-circle  to  a  small  loop. 
EXAMPLES  : — As  the,  because  the,  has  the,  is  the,  it  is  the, 

that  is  the,  what  is  the,  when  is  the,  where  was  the,  which  is 
the. 

c.  By  a  perpendicular  or  horizontal  tick,  joined  finally  to 


PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK.         151 

outlines  in  connection  with  which  the  first  and  second  modes 
of  representing  the  cannot  be  used. 

EXAMPLES  :— About  the,  according  to  the,  against  the,  and 
the,  end  the,  like  the,  order  the,  under  the,  whether  the. 

227.  See  Npte  under  Ing-a — ing-the. 

228.  The  Other  is  the  only  phrase  in  which  the  word  the 
is  written  with  the  stem  Dhee.     This   phrase-sign  may  be 
joined  with  safety  to  preceding  words. 

EXAMPLES: — Can  the  other,  on  the  other,  in  the  other, 
since  the  other- 

229.  Their,  in  phrases,  is  written  the  same  as  there,  which 
see. 

EXAMPLES  : — Their  own,  all  their,  among  all  their,  at  their, 
become  of  their,  charge  of  their,  for  their,  of  all  their,  sanction 
their,  scatter  their. 

230.  Their  —other. — See  Note  under  Other— their. 

231.  Them. — See  Note  under  That— them. 

232.  There,  m  phrases,  is  written  as  follows : 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  Dher3. 

EXAMPLES: — There  are,  there  is,  there  it,  there  may  be, 
there  the,  there  will,  there  would,  there  you.  „. 

Finally  and  medially — 

rt.  By  the  Lengthening  Principle. 

EXAMPLES  :  —Although  there  is,  any  one  there,  did  you 
remain  there,  doing  there,  I  wish  there  was,  if  there  be,  here 
and  there. 

b.  By  the  //tr-hook. 

EXAMPLES: — About  which  there,  be  thr,  could  there  be, 
said  there,  they  were  there,  where  there  has  been. 

c.  By  changing  a  preceding  s-circle  to  a  large  loop. 
EXAMPLES  : — Always  there,  and  as  there  has,  any  one  else 

there,  is  there,  since  there  is,  unless  there. 

233.  The   use  of  the    Lengthening   Principle   and   Large 
Loop,  in  accordance  with  the  rules  of  Practical  Phonography, 
to  add  there,  is  of  special  value  in  the  reporting  of  testimony, 
because  they  come  in  so  frequently  at  the  end  of  a  sentence, 
to  assist  the  reporter,  by  a  single  stroke  of  the  pen,  in  catch- 
ing up  with  the  speaker  before  a  new  sentence  is  begun. 

EXAMPLES: — After  he  came  there,  after  I  saw  him  there, 
any  one  there,  did  you  remain  thr,  doing  there,  down  thr,  how 


152         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

long  had  he  been  thr,  how  long  had  you  been  thr,  how  long 
have  you  been  thr,  how  long  was  he  thr,  of  his  being  thr,  what 
was  said  or  done  there ;  any  business  there,  was  there  no  one 
else  there. 

234.  Therefore,    in  phrases,  may  frequently  be  written 
with  some  one  of  the  short  methods  of  expressing  the  conso- 
nant-combination thr — the  Mr-hook,  the  Lengthening  Princi- 
ple, or  the  Large  Loop — followed  by  either  the  stem  Ef  or  the 
stem  Fer,  according  to  with  which  it  makes  the  best  junction. 

EXAMPLES  : — Had  therefore,  he  is  therefore,  it  is  therefore, 
he  therefore,  it  therefore,  I  am  therefore,  shall  therefore,  you 
will  therefore. 

235.  They  are. — The  phrase  they  are  is  written  as  follows : 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  DHr8. 

EXAMPLES  : — They  are  able  to,  they  are  not,  they  are  said, 
they  are  there. 

Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  the  Lengthening  Principle: 

EXAMPLES  : — If  they  are,  know  they  are,  quite  sure  they  are, 
so  they  are,  that  they  are,  think  they  are,  yet  thr. 

&.  By  the  thr-hook. 

EXAMPLES  : — F"or  which  they  are,  where  thr,  which  thr. 

c.  By  changing  a  preceding  s-circle  to  a  large  loop. 

EXAMPLES  : — And  as  thr,  as  long  as  thr,  as  soon  as  thr,  be- 
cause thr,  I  suppose  thr,  much  as  thr,  or  as  thr,  seems  thr, 
since  they  are,  thinks  thr,  unless  they  are. 

236.  They  have— you  have. — See  Note  under  You 
have— they  have. 

237.  Thr.— When  the  abbreviation  thr  is  found  in  a  phrase 
in  the  List,  it  is  to  be  understood  as  standing  for  either  their, 
there  or  they  are.  according  to  which  is  required  by  the  con- 
text of  the  sentence  m  which  the  sign  is  used. 

EXAMPLES  : — And  that  thr,  are  thr,  have  thr,  or  is  thr, 
seems  thr,  shall  have  been  thr. 

238.  Time — autumn.— The  word  time,  standing  alone, 
should  always  be  written  with  its  abbreviation  (Em1),  to  pre- 
vent conflict  with  autumn  (T1-M).     But  in  phrases,  following 
other  stems,  time  is  generally  written  in  full,  either  with  the 
stem  Tee  and  Em,  or  with  t  indicated  by  halving  and  the 
stem  Em. 


PHONOGRAPHIC    PHRASE   BOOK.          153 

EXAMPLES: — Any  other  time,  at  another  time,  during  that 
time,  long  time,  present  time,  short  time,  this  time ;  at  some 
time,  day  time,  what  time. 

239.  After  a  stem  that  is  halved  to  add  the,  time  is  added 
either  by  the  abbreviation  or  by  the  full  outline,  according  to 
which  makes  the  best  junction. 

EXAMPLES: — During  the  time,  from  the  time,  to  the  time, 
[for  the  time,  Ft8-T-M]. 

240.  To  or  too,  in  phrases,  is  written  or  indicated  as  fol- 
lows: 

Initially — 

a.  By  the  stem  Tee. 

EXAMPLES  : — To  a,  to  all,  to  an,  to  have,  to  my  recollec- 
tion, to  the,  to  their. 

.6.  By  dropping  the  outline  of  the  succeeding  wonl  to  the 
FOURTH  POSITION — that  is,  one  half  the  length  of  a  Tee  be- 
low the  third  position  of  the  same  outline. 

EXAMPLES  : — To  be,  to  do,  to  infer,  to  it,  to  make,  to  reply, 
to  write,  too  deep,  too  much. 

Finally  and  medially — 

a.   By  the  stem  Tee. 

EXAMPLES  : — I  want  to,  I  want  to  know,  not  to  my  knowl- 
edge, ought  to  have  been,  seems  to  have. 

6.   By  halving  the  stem  of  the  preceding  word. 

EXAMPLES  : — Able  to,  did  you  have  anything  to  do,  honor 
to  be,  I  decline  to  say,  mean  to,  ought  to,  so  to  speak. 

c.  By  changing  the  preceding  s-circle  to  a  small  loop. 

EXAMPLES  : — As  to,  how  as  to,  so  as  to,  that  is  to,  that  is  to 
say. 

241.  Until— I   think. —  Until  should  always  be  written 
with  a  decided  backward  slant  to  the  stem  El,  to  prevent  its 
conflicting  with  I  think. 

EXAMPLES: — Until  it,  until  thr,  until  there  is. 

242.  Us,  in  phrases,  is  written  with  both  the  stem  Ess  and 
the  s-circle. 

EXAMPLES  : — Against  us,  among  us,  let  us,  let  us  be. 

243.  The  circle,  however,  should  not  be  used  indiscrim- 
inately for  us  after  verbs,  because  sometimes  it  will  conflict 
with  the  termination  of  the  third  person  singular  of  regular 
verbs  in  the  present  tense  of  the  indicative  mood;  as  in  the 
phrases  :  Give  us — gives,  move  us — moves,  etc. 


154          PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

244.  "Was,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows: 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  Zee. 

EXAMPLES  : — Was  a,  was  all,  was  an,  was  another,  was  he, 
was  it,  was  said,  was  the,  was  there. 
Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  the  stem  Zee. 

EXAMPLES  :— Always  was,  he  was,  I  was,  nothing  was  said, 
that  was,  there  was  never. 

b.  By  the  initial  Way-hook  in  combination   with   a  final 
2-circle. 

EXAMPLES  : — It  was,  what  was  after%vards,  where  was  your. 

245.  Was  not,  standing  alone  or  beginning  a  phrase,  is 
written  with  Zee'-Net,  because  Zent^in  rapid  writing,  would 
conflict  with  hod  not  /Dent1). 

246.  But  when  IMS  not  is  joined  to  a  preceding  outline, 
with  which  it  forms  a  distinct  angle,  Zent  may  be  used. 

EXAMPLE  : — I  was  not. 

247.  Was  thr. — When  was  titr  (Zeether)  is  added  to  the 
stem  Hay,  it  should  be  extended  down  quite  low,  so  that  it 
will  not  conflict  with  was. 

EXAMPLES  : — He  was,  he  was  thr. 

248.  These   two   useful  phrase-signs  are  very  easily  and 
quickly  made  where  thoroughly  mastered.    No  angle  between 
the  Hay  and  the  Zee  should  be  attempted,  and  the  principal 
part  of  the  shading  should  be  on  the  last  half  of  the  Hay  and 
the  first  half  of  the  Zee. 

249.  There  is  a  tendency  with  some  to  bring  the  lower  end 
of  the  Zee  or  Zeether  around  too  far,  giving  it  the  slant  of 
Zhee,  which  should  be  carefully  guarded  against. 

250.  The  learner  should  practice  on  these  outlines  until  he 
can  write  them  with  precision  with  a  single,  quick  stroke  of 
the  pen. 

251.  We,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows  : 
Initially — 

a.  By  the  stem  Way. 

EXAMPLES  : — \Ve  can,  we  cannot,  we  have  been  thr,  we 
may,  we  must,  we  were. 

b.  By  brief  w. 

EXAMPLES: — We  charge,  we  denounce,  we  did,  we  fear, 
we  say,  we  think. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         155 

252.  The  stem-sign  for  we  is  generally  used  when  the 
next  word  following  may  be  added  by  a  hook  (initial  or  final) 
on  the  Way,  or  when  it  begins  with  an  /-hook  stem. 

EXAMPLES  : — We  are,  we  have,  we  will,  we  believe,  we 
call. 

Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  the  Way-hook. 

EXAMPLES  : — But  we,  can  we,  do  we,  had  we,  ought  we, 
where  we. 

6.  By  brief  w. 

EXAMPLES  : — If  we,  shall  we,  shall  we  say,  should  we, 
where  were  we. 

c.  Occasionally  by  the  stem  Way. 

EXAMPLES  : — Such  as  we,  such  as  we  have. 

253-  Well,  written  with  its  abbreviation  (Lee),  may  be 
joined  in  any  part  of  a  phrase.  See  Note  under  111. 

EXAMPLES  : — Well  done,  well  known,  as  well  as,  may  as 
well. 

254.  In  the  middle  or«at  the  end  of  phrases,  well  may  be 
struck  downward,  when  El  will  make  a  better  junction,  or  a 
more  facile  form,  than  Lee. 

EXAMPLES  : — It  is  well  known,  just  as  well  as. 

255.  W^ere,  written  with  its  abbreviation  (Ree),  may  be 
joined  in  any  part  of  a  phrase.     See  Note  under  Are. 

EXAMPLES  :  —Were  a-n,  were  all,  were  the,  were  there,  were 
we,  were  you  present,  I  think  there  were,  such  were,  then 
there  were,  there  were,  there  were  there,  they  were  not,  unless 
you  were,  we  were,  what  were  you  doing,  where  were  those, 
which  were. 

256.  Were  not — were  there. — A  little  care  is  needed 
in  writing  the  outlines  of  these  phrases,  especially  when  they 
are  joined  to  preceding  stems,  to  make  them  so  that  they  will 
always  be  distinct.     This  may  be  done  by  invariably  making 
the  sign  for  were  not  quite  small. 

EXAMPLES  : — That  were  not — that  were  there,  they  were 
not — they  were  there,  we  were  not — we  were  there. 

257.  When— Why. —  When  may  be  joined  freely  in  any 
part  of  a  phrase ;  but  why  is  never  joined  to  a  preceding  word. 

EXAMPLE: — About  when. 

258.  Who  would.  -See  Note  under  He  would. 


156        PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

259.  Will,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows  : 
Initially — 

By  the  stem  Lee8. 

EXAMPLES  : — Will  all,  will  another,  will  be,  will  have,  will 
not,  will  the,  will  there  not  be,  will  you  look. 
P'mally  and  medially — 

a.  By  the  Z-hook. 

EXAMPLES  : — All  will,  it  will  be,  that  will,  these  will,  we 
will,  what  will  be,  where  will  thr. 

b.  Occasionally  by  the  stem  Lee. 

EXAMPLES  : — As  far  as  will,  eacH  will,  there  will  be. 

260.  W^oman,   in  phrases,    may  be   distinguished   from 
women,  by  using  the  brief-io. 

EXAMPLE  : — Young  woman. 

261.  Would,  in  phrases,  is  written  as  follows: 
Initially — 

a.  By  the  stem  Way. 

EXAMPLES  :  —Would  a,  would  be,  would  have  done,  would 
it,  would  make,  would  not. 

b.  By  brief-to. 

EXAMPLES  : — Would  do,  would  say,  would  see,  would 
they. 

Finally  and  medially— 

a.  By  the  stem  Way. 

EXAMPLES: — As  would,  I  would  be,  such  as  would,  you 
would  have. 

b.  By  brief-io. 

EXAMPLES  : — It  would,  she  would,  such  would  be,  there 
would,  they  would,  we  would  be,  what  would  be,  where 
would  you. 

c.  Rarely  by  the  stem  Wed. 

EXAMPLES: — Than  it  would,  then  it  would,  [than  there 
would]. 

262.  You — your. — Both  you  and  your,  in  phrases,  are 
written  as  follows: 

Initially — 

a.  By  the  stem  Yay8. 

EXAMPLES  : — You  and,  you  are,  you  believe,  you  have. 

b.  Before  certain  stems,  by  brief- y.     See  section  61,  b. 
EXAMPLES  : — You  can,  you  did,  you  fear,  you  know,  you 

may,  you  recall,  you  say,  you  shall,  you  think. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         157 

Finally  and  medially — 

a.  By  the  Yay-hook. 

EXAMPLES  : — At  your,  but  you-r,  can  you  tell,  did  you 
claim,  were  you,  jvhere  do  you  live. 

b.  By  brief-?/. 

EXAMPLES  : — About  you-r,  among  you-r,  ask  you,  have  you 
anything,  I  hope  you  may,  what  were  you. 

c.  Occasionally  by  the  stem  Yay. 

EXAMPLES  : — After  your  own,  as  long  as  you  have,  as  you, 
between  you-r,  cannot  you,  I  understand  you,  such  as  you-r 

263.  It  will  be  observed  that  at  the  end  of  a  phrase,  if  con- 
venient, the  brief  sign  is  generally  used.      But  if  another  word 
conies  afier  you,  that  may  be  written  with  a  hook,  the  stem 
Yay  is  used. 

EXAMPLES  : — On  your — on  your  own,  when  you — when 
you  are. 

264.  YOU   have— they   have. — When  the  phrase  you 
have,  written  with  the  stem  Yay  and  i?-hook,  is  joined  to  a 
preceding  stem,  the  sign  Yev  should  be  struck  backward  to 
the  left  with  a  decided  slant  (giving  it  an  angle  of  about  thirty 
degrees),  so  as  to  prevent  any  possibility  of  its  being  mistaken 
for  they  have  (DHev). 

265.  On  the  other  hand,  care  should  be  taken,  when  they 
have  is  similarly  joined,  not  to  give  the  DHev  the  slightest 
backward  slant  or  Chay  direction. 

EXAMPLES  : — All  that  you  have,  all  that  they  have. 

266.  If,  however,  the  first  part  of  the  outline  will  not  per- 
mit the  Yev  to  be  thus  slanted,  it  should  be  disjoined  and 
written  in  position,  or  else  brief-y  with  the  stem  Vee  used 
instead. 

267.  Your.— See  You— your. 

258.  If  the  Yay-hook  is  used  for  your  it  should  be  made 
decidedly  large,  to  prevent  its  conflicting  with  the  }--hook  for 
our.  If  this  rule  is  observed,  and  the  r-hook  for  our  is  al- 
ways made  small,  there  will  be  no  difficulty.  The  careless 
or  inexact  writer,  however,  in  all  cases  where  there  is  danger 
of  conflict,  had  better  employ  the  stem  Yay  for  your. 

EXAMPLES  : — At  your,  at  your  house. 


158         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

PHRASES   DISTINGUISHED. 

269.  In  the  list  given  below  will  be   found  phrases   and 
words  that  are  specially  distinguished  by  some  difference  of 
outline,  position,  vocalization,  etc.;  which,  in  most  instances, 
is  somewhat  arbitrary  in  character,  and,  therefore,  requires  to 
be  learned  irrespective  of  the  general  rules. 

270.  Thus,  to  make  the  outlines  of  did  we   and  did  you 
perfectly  secure  from  being  mistaken  for  those  of  do  we  and 
do  you,  let  the  tips  of  the  hooks  in  did  we  and  did  you  rest  on 
the  line,  the  stems  crossing  it;  and,  in  writing  do  you  and  do 
we,  be  careful  to  have  the  stems  just  touch  the  line  without 
crossing  it. 

A 
At  last — at  least. 

B 
Be  regarded — be  regretted. 

C 

Court  of  record — court  record. 

D 

Did  we — do  we;  did  you— do  you. 

H 

Half  an  hour — oftener  [FnJ-R]  ;  he  would — how  would— 
who  would ;  Honorable  gentleman — Honorable  gentlemen. 

I 

I  forget — I  forgot ;  I  propose — I  purpose ;  I  suppose — I  sup- 
posed ;  in  conclusion — in  connection ;  in  opposition — in  pos- 
session j  in  preparation — in  proportion ;  in  sight — in  situ ;  in 
this  city — in  this  suit. 

M 
My  own — mine. 

N 
No  communication — no  connection. 

O 

Of  his  decease — of  his  disease. 

P 
Plaintiff's  counsel — defendant's  counsel. 

T 

They  are  able  to — they  are  believed;  they  did  not — they 
do  not ;  to  it — to  the. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.          459 

W 

We  all — we  will;  we  regard — we  regret;  what  do  you — 
what  did  you ;  with  regard — with  regret. 

You  all — you  will;  young  man — young  men;  young  woman 
— young  women  [Y8-W-Mn.J 


KEY  TO  DERIVATIVES  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 

271.  The   Table  of  Abbreviations,  commencing   on   page 
105,  gives  a  complete  list  of  all  words  that  are  written  with 
contracted  outlines,  that  do  not  fall  within  the  general  rules  of 
abbreviation  of  the  system. 

272.  -When   a   word    has    derivatives,    the    phonographic 
forms  of  the  more  important  of  such  derivatives  are  added, 
following  on  in  the  same  line  with  the  abbreviations  of  the 
primitive.  • 

273.  The  following  is  a  Key  to  the  additional  forms : 
According. — Accordingly. 

Acknowledge. — Acknowledged,  acknowledging,  acknowl- 
edgment. 

Aili-antage. — Advantageous,  advantageously,  advantageous- 
ness,  disadvantage. 

Advertise. — Advertised,  advertising,  advertisement,  adver- 
tiser. 

Among. — Amongst. 

Angel. — Angelic,  angelical-ly. 

Artificial. — Artificially. 

Astvnish-ed.  —Astonishing,  astonishingly,  astonishment. 

AH-''. — Awed,  awing,  awe-struck,  awful,  awfully. 

Become. — Became,  becoming,  becomingly. 

Before. — Beforehand. 

Belief -ve. — Believed,  believing,  believable,  disbelief-ve,  un- 
belief. 

Belong. — Belonged,  belonging. 

Beneficial. — Beneficially. 

Jirofher. — Brother-in-law. 

t \ipable. — Capableness,  capability,  incapable. 

Change. — Changed,  changing,  changeableness,  exchange, 
unchangeable,  interchange. 

Charge  — Charged,  charging,  chargeable,  discharge. 

'  'l/ristian. — Christianity,  christianization. 


leo         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

Collect. — Collected,  collecting. 

Come. — Cometh. 

Correct. — Corrected,  correcting,  correctly,  correctness. 

Cross-examine. — Cross-examined,  cross-examining. 

Deliver. — Delivered,  deliveiing,  delivery,  deliverance,  de- 
liverer, redeliver,  redelivery,  undelivered. 

Develop. — Developed,  developing,  development,    undevel- 
oped. 

Differ-ence-ent. — Differed,  differing,  differences,  differential, 
indifferent. 

DifficuM-y.— Difficult-y. 

Dignify. — Dignified,  dignifying. 

Discriminate. — Indiscriminate. 

Distinct. — Distinctness,  indistinct,  indistinctness. 

Doctrine. —Indoctrinate. 

Dwell. — Dwelt,  dwelling,  dweller. 

Effect.— Effected,  effecting, 

Endeavor. —  Endeavored,  endeavoring. 

Establish. — Established,  establishing,  establishment. 

Experience. — Experienced,  experiencing,  inexperienced. 

Extraordinary. — Extraordinarily. 

Familiar. — Familiarize,  familiarized,  familiarizing,  familiar- 
ly, unfamiliar. 

First. — Firstly.  1 

Form. — Formed,   forming,  inform,  information,   informer, 
informal,  informality,  uniform,  perform,  reform. 

Frequent. — Frequented,  frequenting,  frequently,  infrequent, 
unfrequented. 

aeration. — Degeneration,  progeneration,  regeneration. 

Govern. — Governed,   governing,    governable,    government, 
governmental,  ungovernable. 

Health-y. — Healthful,  healthfulness,  healthily,  healthiness, 
unhealthy. 

Hear.—  Hearing. 

Heaven.  -  Heavenliness,  heavenly,  heavenward. 

Held. — Beheld,  upheld,  withheld. 

Help. — Helped,  helping,  helpful,  helpfulness,  helpless,  help- 
lessly, helplessness. 

Here. — Hereabout,  hereafter,  hereat,  hereby,  herein,  here- 
inafter, hereinbefore,  hereon,  hereto,  heretofore,  hereunto. 

History. — Historian,  historic,  historical-ly. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         iei 

Home. — Homeliness,  homely,  homeward. 

Immediate. — Immediately,  immediateness. 

Importance-t. — Importantly,  unimportant. 
'  -  Infer. — Inferred,  inferring,  inferable,  inferential. 

Influence. — Influenced,  influencing,  influential,  uninfluenced. 

Inscribe. — Inscribe,  inscribed,  inscribing,  inscription. 

Intelligence. — Intelligibility,  intelligible,  intelligibleness. 

Intelligent. — Intelligently. 

Large. — Larger,  largest,  largely,  largeness 

Long. — Longer,  longest. 

Malignant. — Malignantly,  malignancy. 

Manufacture. — Non-manufacturing. 

Mistake. — Mistaking,  mistaken,  unmistakable. 

Neglect. — Neglected,  neglecting,  neglectful. 

jVew?  — Newly,  newness,  news. 

Number. — Numbered,  numbering,  numberless,  outnumber, 
unnumbered. 

Object. — Objected,  objecting. 

Objection.— Objectionable. 

Opinion. — Opinionated,  opinionative,  opinioned,  self-opin- 
ioned. 

Other.— Others. 

Over.. — Overcome. 

Owe. — Owed,  owing,  owes. 

Own.— Owned,  owning,  owner. 

Parliament. — Parliamentary. 

Part. — Parted,  parting,  partly,  counterpart. 

Particular. — Particulars,   particularly,  particularity,  partic- 
ularize. 

Peculiar.- — Peculiarly. 

People. — Peopled , 

Popular-ity. — Popularly,  unpopular. 

Possible-y.  — Impossible-y. 

Practicable-y. — Impracticability,  impracticable. 

Practice. — Practiced,  practicing,  practices. 

Principal-le. — Principally,  principled,  unprincipled. 

Probability. — Improbability. 

Probable-y.— Improbable-y. 

Proportion. — Disproportion. 

Public-sh. — Published,    publishing,    publican,  publication, 
publicly,  unpublished. 


162        PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

Qualify. — Qualified,  qualifying,  qualification,  disqualify,  dis- 
qualification, unqualified. 

Question, — Questioned,  questioning,  questionable,  unques- 
tioriable-y,  cross-question. 

Recoiled. — Recollected,  recollecting. 

Recoverable. — Irrecoverable. 

Regular. — Regularly,  irregular,  irregularly 

Regularity.  — Irregularity. 

Religion. — Irreligion. 

Remark. — Remarked,  remarking,  remarkable. 

Remember. — Remembered,  remembering,  misremember,  dis- 
rcmember. 

Represent-ative. — Represented,  representing,  misrepresent. 

Representation. — Misrepresentation. 

Republic-sh. — Republican,  republication,  republicanism. 

Repugnant. — Repugnancy,  repugnantly. 

Responsibility. — Irresponsibility. 

Responsible-y. — Irresponsible-y. 

Satisfactory. — Satisfactorily,  unsatisfactory,  unsatisfactorily. 

Send. — Sending. 

Several. — Severally. 

Signify. — Signified,  signifying,  significance,  significancy, 
significant,  signification,  insignificant,  insignificancy. 

Similar. — Dissimilar. 

Similarity. — Dissimilarity. 

Singular. — Singularity,  singularly. 

Speak. — Bespeak,  speakable,  unspeakable. 

Spoke. — Bespoke,  spoken,  bespoken,  outspoken. 

Surprise. — Surprised,  surprising. 

Swear. — Swearing. 

Swift. — Swifter,  swiftest,  swiitly,  swiftness. 

Swore. — Sworn. 

Sympathy. — Sympathized,  sympathizing,  sympathetic,  sym- 
pathetical-ly. 

System.—  System! ze,  systematize. 

Th'ink-ed.—  Thankful,  Thanksgiving-day. 

Their.— Theirs. 

Them. — Themselves. 

Thing. — Things,  anything,  something,  nothing. 

Think. — Bethink,  thinker,  unthinking. 

Time.  — Timely. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         IGS 

Truth. — Truthful,  truthfulness,  untruth,  untruthful,  untruth- 
fulness. 

Usual-ly. — Unusual-ly. 

What.— Whatever. 

When. — Whenever,  whensoever. 

Where. — Anywhere,  nowhere,  somewhere,  wherever. 

Which.  — Whichever,  whichsoever. 

Whom. — Whomsoever. 

Will. — Willful-ly,  willing,  willingly. 

With.— Within. 

World. — Worldliness,  worldly. 

Worth. — Worthless,  worthlessness. 

Year. — Years,  leap-year. 

Young.—  Younger,  youngest. 

Your. — Yours,  yourself. 

Youth. — Youthful  youthfulness. 


KEY  TO  THE  EXERCISES  FOR  PRACTICE  ON 
THE   PHRASES 

I.  If  we  bear  in  mind  that  after  all,  at  another  time,  we 
may  get  all  that  we  wish  in  this  way,  we  shall  soon  see  that 
there  is  no  necessity  for  despondency. 

•2.  For  the  purpose  of  the  case  now  on  trial  I  will  admit 
everything  that  is  claimed  on  the  part  of  the  counsel  on  the 
other  side. 

3.  How  soon  after  that  time  was  it  that  plaintiff's  counsel 
caiied  upon   you  in  reference  to' the  accident  that  happened 
in  the  latter  part  of  the  month  of  December? 

4.  And  is  there    nothing  to  be  said  upon  the   subject  of 
whether  we  are  to  be  deprived  of  our  rights,  without  having 
them  tested  in  a  court  of  justice? 

5.  If  another  such  occurrence  takes  place  in  the   club,  I 
shall  be  obliged  to  resign. 

6.  The  sum  and  substance  of  the  whole  matter  is  contained 
in  a  nut-shell. 

7.  In  speaking  of  a  note,  did  you  have  reference  to  your 
own  note  ? 

8.  How  is  your  business  coming  on,  and  what  have  you  to 
say  about  taking  a  trip  to  the  city  of  Boston  next  week  ?    » 


164         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

9.  One  thing  at  least  is  true,  and  that  is,  I  have  at  last  as- 
certained just  where  I  stand  among  all  my  friends  and  neigh- 
bors. 

10.  No  human  being  can  tell  when  we  shall  have  prosper- 
ous times  again. 

11.  I  ask  you  if  you  cannot  say  something  that  will  put  a 
stop  to  this  disturbance  ? 

12.  I  have  never  seen  a  first-rate  phonographer   who  did 
not  take  pains  with  his  penmanship. 

13.  We  think  there  is  too  much  talk  and  not  enough  work. 

14.  I  am  quite  sure  they  are  going  to  do  something  about 
it  very  soon  after  the  president  of  the  road  arrives  in  town. 

15.  Are  you  in  the  habit  of  making  such  remarks  as  that 
before  giving  the  subject  proper  reflection? 

1 6.  As  long  as  there  is  no  fault  found,  and  you  are  satisfied, 
no  one  has  a  right  to  complain. 

17.  Mr.  Speaker:— According  to  my  views  of  the  subject 
before  the  House,  this  measure  that  is  proposed  will  not  meet 
with  the  approval  of  the  country  at  large. 

1 8.  Except  on  one  or  two  occasions  they  have  been  orderly 
and  well-behaved. 

19.  Do  you  belong  to  the  church,  and  do  you  believe  in  its 
teachings  ? 

20.  He  left  the  place  owing  a  large  sum  of  money — in  fact 
he  owed  nearly  every  one  in  the  town — he  was  owing  the 
proprietor  of  the  hotel,  he  had  bills  at  the  clothing-store,  the 
shoe-store,  the  book-store  and  the  drug-store,,  and   he  had  a 
disgraceful  score  against  him  at  the  lager-beer  saloon. 

21.  From  the  time  your  letter  came,  I  was  satisfied  that 
there  was  something  wrong,  and  that  he  was  not  the  man  we 
had  taken  him  to  be. 

22.  Be  kind  enough  to  tell   me  whether  you  were  in  his 
place  of  business  on  the  day  of  the  date  of  the  check  in  suit? 

23.  Then  did  you  have  any  interview  with  the  plantiff  at 
which  you  agreed  at  some  future  time  to  enter  into  co-partner- 
ship with  him  ? 

24.  Before  you  can  reply  to    the   assertions   made   in  his 
speech,  you  must   examine   thoroughly  into  the  facts  of  the 
case. 

25.  In  some  cases  it  is  better  to  remain  silent  than  to  speak, 
even  if  it  be  to  tell  the  truth. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.          ies 

26.  It  is  quite  certain  that  sometimes  there  is  a  great  deal 
too  much  said  by  lawyers  in  trying  a  case. 

27.  On  my  part  I  cannot  say  anything  more  than  that  about 
it. 

28.  What  were  you  doing  at  the  court-house  the  other  day? 

29.  As  long  as  things  remain  in  statu  quo  we    shall   have 
nothing  to  do. 

30.  We  find  things  now  just  as  we  found  them  six  or  eight 
weeks  ago. 

31.  The  District  Attorney  will  not  be  able  to  do  anything 
in  that  matter  until  they  are  all  arrested. 

32.  I  am  very  glad  to  hear  that  matters  are  as  well  as  they 
are. 

33.  Having  been  led  to  suppose  that  he  was  acting  in  good 
faith,  and  would  be  as  good  as  his  word,  I  made  the  agree- 
ment with  him. 

34.  There  was  no  such  mode  of  combination  mentioned  so 
far  as  our  party  was  concerned. 

35.  It  is,  indeed,  sad  to  think  that  he  has  no  doubt  lost  his 
reason  for  ever. 

36.  I  am  sure  there  is  not  a  thing  to  be  said  in  his  favor. 

37.  Can  you  tell  how  much  he  is  earning  in  his  new  posi- 
tion? 

38.  By  the  by,  between  you  and  me,  what  do  you  think  will 
be  the  result  of  this  trial  ? 

39.  Day  after  day  I  have  called  on  you,  but  have  not  found 
you  in  your  office. 

40.  We  are  doing  all  that  we  possibly  can ;  that  is  to  say, 
we  are  working  night  and  day. 

41.  I  hope  you  may  find  things  as  they  would  have  been 
if  he  had  remained  with  you. 

42.  I  take  occasion  to  say  that  I  have  now  concluded  that 
in  less  than  a  year  after  the  first  of  May  there  will  be  no  busi- 
ness done  there. 

43.  Bearing  in  mind  everything  that  has  been  done,  my 
be>t  impression  is  that  the  job  will  be  completed  by  Monday 
afternoon. 

44.  I  admit  calling  there  on  that  day,  but  I  cannot  say  who 
was  present. 

45.  We  ought  never  to  come  away  without  seeing  each  one 
of  the  committee. 


166         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 


46.  In  March  last  did  you  keep  house  there,  or  did  you  oc- 
cupy only  a  single  room  ? 

47.  A  half  a  loaf  is  better  than  no  bread  at  all. 

48.  The  remark  should  never  have  been  made  unless  he 
had  intended  to  follow  it  up  with  proof — it  was  not  called  for 
in  the  connection  in  which  it  was  uttered. 

49.  I  shall  be  most  happy  to  have  you  call  at  your  earliest 
convenience. 

50.  Are  you  sure  of  it,  or  is  there  some  doubt  in  your  mind 
on  the  point  ? 

51.  Did  you  have  anything  to  say  to  him  at  the  time  of  your 
call  there  ? 

52.  It  was  either  at  that  particular  time,  or  just  about  that 
time  that  I  spoke  with  him. 

53.  I  can  mention  a  reason  that  I  think  is   more  probable 
than    any  other  that  has  been   given.     Very  well,  you  can 
state  it. 

54.  Will  it  not  be  better  to  remain  there  in  one  place  than 
to  be  running  hither  and  thither  ? 

55.  At  first  I  conducted  the  proceedings  entirely  alone,  but 
after  that,  I  was  away  a  great  deal  of  the  time  and  had  to  em- 
ploy an  assistant. 

56.  I  have  the  honor  to  transmit  a  message  to  you  from  the 
governor. 

57.  If  we  may  depend  upon  the  statements  that  have  been 
made,  then  ought  we  not  to  take  immediate  action  rather  than 
to  wait  ? 

58.  I  shall  remain  until  such  time  as  he  shall  return. 

59.  They  dare   not  say   it  in  our  presence,  because   they 
know  that  we  can  refute  the  slander. 

60.  They  have  charge  of  their  own  business,  but  when  they 
move  in  their  new  building  they  will  require  an  assistant 

61.  How  do  you  like  being  engaged  in  the  public  service 
for  a  little  while? 

62.  Were  you  informed  that  the  note  had  gone  to  pro- 
test? 

63.  All  that  I  heard  was  that  some  one  or  other  had  been 
there  after  you  left,  who  said  that  he  came  there   on  his  own 
behalf — no  one  else  was  there  that  I  am  aware  of. 

64.  By  whom  were  you  notified  of  my  arrival  ?     I  was  not 
notified  at  all. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         ie? 


65.  Is  the  news  from  Great  Britain  as  gratifying   as  you 
expected  ?     I  find  everything  all  right. 

66.  Among  all  their  own  people  there  was  no  one  to  take 
their  part. 

67.  Was  he  there  before  or  after  you  had  dined  ?     I  be- 
lieve that  he  was  there  just  after  dinner  time. 

68.  They  are  much  better  educated  than  their  brothers. 

69.  Do  you  remember  now,  or  did  you   remember  then, 
what  was  said  by  the  minister  on  the  subject  of  infant  bap- 
tisms ? 

70.  Mr.  President  and  fellow  citizens  :   Am  I  to  be  thus 
traduced  after  an  honorable  discharge  from  the  service  of  my 
country? 

71.  Did  you  order  the  medicine  from  the  drug-store  on  the 
corner  of  2ist  street  ? 

72.  A    good    many   things    have    been    said   by   you,  or 
have    been   insinuated  by   others,   that   cannot    possibly  be 
true. 

73.  Can  there  be  anything  which  will  require  more  attention 
<on  your  part  than  that? 

74.  What  is  the  amount  of  money  that  you  think  should  be 
paid  for  your  place  in  the  country  ? 

75.  I  may  be  told  that  that  will  end  the  matter  which  they, 
are  now  discussing  with  such  vehemence. 

76.  What  are  you  going  to  do  to-morrow  morning  at  the 
Custom  House? 

77.  I  have  received  a  subpoena  duces  tecum  to  produce  in 
court  all  the  books,  documents,  papers,  etc.  (et  cetera),  that  are 
now  in  my  possession. 

78.  That  is  quite  as  much  as  they  are  able  to  do  for  each 
other,  and  the  men  had  therefore  better  give  up  the  under- 
taking. 

79.  Have  you  been  delivering  a  lecture  in  the  city  of  New 
York  this  fall  ? 

80.  Should  he  ever  take  up  the  argument,  I  know  of  no  one 
who  is  able  to  answer  him.     He  is,  therefore,  without  doubt 
the  very  best  man  for  it. 

81.  Can  you  tell  how  many  years,  in  all  probability,  he  will 
be  absent  from  the  country  ? 

82.  Are  you  aware  that  from  day  to  day  he  is  getting  stronger 
and  better  in  every  respect? 


168         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

83.  A  man,  whose  name  I  forget,  goes  to  sleep  every  Sun- 
day in  the  choir  of  the  Episcopal  church. 

84.  Had  you  gone  there  and  asked  for  me  they  would  have 
sent  a  messenger  after  me  immediately. 

85.  He  can  tell  you  many  things  that  will  be  entirely  new 
to  you. 

86.  The  next  time  you  see  him  there  tell  him  that  I  want  to 
see  him  at  once. 

87.  I  agree  that  I  said  so,  and  I  shall  not  attempt  to  take 
back  the  remark. 

88.  I   couldn't   understand  whether  he  had  any  business 
there  at  that  time  or  not. 

89.  How  is  it  that  the  bill  of  sale  had  no  articles  mentioned 
in  the  schedule  but  such  as  were  entirely  worthless  ? 

90.  It  occurred  a  good  while  ago,  but  it  is  only  very  lately 
that  it  has  come  to  my  notice. 

91.  As  they  are  coming  in  his  absence,  let  us  be  prepared 
to  receive  them  in  a  proper  manner. 

92.  Who  would  have  undertaken  the  work  he  would  have 
left  if  he  had  been  removed? 

93.  Where  is  there  a  place  in  the  world  like  this  ? 

94.  As  for  ourselves,  if  we  wish  anything  under  the  sun, 
we  can  have  it. 

95.  Is  it  as  the  witnesses  for  the  defence  say  it  is,  or  is  it  a 
made-up  story  ? 

96.  I  want  time  to  consider  the  matter  more  fully  before  I 
reply. 

97.  Have  you  ever  known  of  a  transaction  like  that  ?     I 
won't  say  that  I  have. 

98.  We  were  able  to  sail  so  much  faster  than  they  did,  that 
we  soon  ran  alongside  of  their  craft. 

99.  By  and  by  they  will  be  compelled  to  give  up  the  prop- 
erty. 

100.  They  were  in  the  habit  of  calling  both  before  and 
after  school. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         169 

DEFINITIONS  OF  LAW  AND  OTHER  PECULIAR 
TERMS. 

274.  These  definitions  have  been  taken  mostly  from 
Bouvier's  Law  Dictionary  and  Webster's  Unabridged. 

A 

Account  current. — A  running  or  open  account  between 
two  persons. 

Ad  valorem. — According  to  the  value.  Duties  which 
are  levied  on  commodities  at  certain  rates  per  centum  on  their 
value,  are  called  ad  valorem  duties. 

B 

Bill  of  exchange. — A  Bill  of  Exchange  is  defined  to 
be  an  open  letter  of  request  from,  and  order  by,  one  person  on 
another,  to  pay  a  sum  of  money  therein  mentioned  to  a  third 
person,  on  aemand,  or  at  a  future  time  therein  specified. 

Bill  of  particulars. — A  detailed,  informal  statement  of 
a  plaintiff's  cause  of  action,  or  of  the  defendant's  set-off. 

Bill  Of  sale. — An  agreement  in  writing,  under  seal,  by 
which  a  man  transfers  the  right  or  interest  he  has  in  goods 
and  chattels  to  another. 

Bills  payable. — Engagements  which  a  merchant  has 
entered  into  in  writing,  and  which  he  is  to  pay  on  their  becom- 
ing due. 

Bills  receivable. — Promissory  notes,  bills  of  exchange, 
bonds  and  other  evidences  or  securities  which  a  merchant  or 
trader  holds,  and  which  are  payable  to  him. 

Bona  fide. — In  or  with  good  faith. 

C 

Carte  blanche. — The  signature  of  an  individual  or  more, 
on  a  white  paper,  with  a  sufficient  space  left  above  it  to  write 
a  note  or  other  writing.  Full  power. 

Casus  belli. — That  which  involves  or  justifies  war. 

Cause  of  action. — By  this  phrase  is  understood  the 
right  to  bring  an  action. 

Caveat  emptor. — Let  the  buyer  beware.  Let  the  pur- 
chaser take  heed  ;  that  is,  let  him  see  to  it,  that  the  title  he  is 
buying  is  good. 


17O         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 


Cestuy*  que  trust.— He  for  whose  benefit  another 
person  is  seised  of  land  or  tenements,  or  is  possessed  of  per- 
sonal property. 

Cestuy  que  use. — He  to  whose  use  land  is  granted  to 
another  person. 

Cestuy  que  Vie.— He  for  whose  life  land  is  holden 
by  another  person. 

Charge  d'  Affaires. — A  diplomatic  representative  or  min- 
ister of  an  inferior  grade,  at  a  foreign  court,  to  whose  care  are 
confided  the  affairs  of  his  nation. 

Charitable  uses.— Gifts  to  general  public  uses,  which 
may  extend  to  the  rich  as  well  as  the  poor. 

Charter  party  .—A  contract  of  affreightment  in  writing, 
by  which  the  owner  of  a  ship  or  other  vessel  lets  the  whole, 
or  a  part  of  her,  to  a  merchant  or  other  person  for  the  con- 
veyance of  goods,  on  a  particular  voyage,  in  consideration  of 
the  payment  of  freight. 

Chef-d'oeuvre. — A  masterpiece. 

Civil  Law. — The  municipal  code  of  the  Romans  is  so 
called.  It  is  a  rule  of  action,  adopted  by  mankind  in  a  state 
of  society.  It  denotes  also  the  municipal  law  of  the  land. 

Civil  List. — Formerly  a  list  of  the  entire  expenses  of  the 
civil  government ;  hence,  the  officers  of  civil  government,  who 
are  paid  from  the  public  treasury;  also,  the  revenue  appro- 
priated to  support  the  civil  government. 

Civil  Suit. — A  suit  for  a  private  claim  or  injury. 

Collateral  facts. — Facts  unconnected  with  the  issue  or 
matter  in  dispute. 

Collateral  warranty. — Where  the  heir's  title  to  the  land 
neither  was,  nor  could  have  been,  derived  from  the  warranting 
ancestor;  and  yet  barred  the  heir  from  ever  claiming  the  land, 
and  also  imposed  upon  him  the  same  obligation  of  giving  the 
warrantee  other  lands,  in  case  of  eviction,  as  if  the  warranty 
were  lineal,  provided  the  heir  had  assets. 

Common  Carrier. — One  who  undertakes  for  hire  or 
reward  to  transport  the  goods  of  any  who  may  choose  to  em- 
ploy him,  from  place  to  place. 


*  Also  spelled  Cestui. 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         171 

Common  Law. — The  unwritten  law ;  the  law  that  re- 
ceives its  binding  force  from  immemorial  usage  and  universal 
reception,  in  distinction  from  the  written  or  statute  law.  The 
term  common  law  is  often  used  in  contradistinction  from  statute 
law  and  from  equity. 

Common  scold. — A  woman,  who,  in  consequence  of 
her  boisterous,  disorderly  and  quarrelsome  tongue,  is  a  public 
nuisance  to  the  neighborhood. 

Compound  interest. — Interest  allowed  upon  interest. 

Condition  precedent.— A  condition  which  must  be 
performed  before  the  estate  will  vest,  or  before  the  obligation 
is  to  be  performed. 

Confidential  communication. — Whatever  is  com- 
municated professedly  by  a  client  to  his  .counsel,  solicitor  or 
attorney,  is  considered  as  a  confidential  communication. 

Corpus  delicti. — The  body  of  the  offence  ;  the  essence 
of  the  crime.  It  is  a  general  rule  not  to  convict  unless  the 
corpus  delicti  can  be  established  ;  that  is,  until  the  dead  body 
has  been  found. 

Counter  affidavit. — An  affidavit  made  in  opposition  to 
one  already  made  ;  this  is  allowed  in  the  preliminary  exam- 
ination of  some  cases. 

Court  martial. — A  court  authorized  by  the  articles  of 
war,  for  the  trial  of  all  offenders  in  the  army  or  navy,  for  mili- 
tary offences. 

Cross  action. — An  action  by  a  defendant  in  an  action, 
against  the  plaintiff  in  the  same  action,  upon  the  same  contract, 
or  for  the  same  tort. 

Cross  bill. — A  cross  bill  is  one  which  is  brought  by  a 
defendant  in  a  suit  against  the  plaintiff,  respecting  the  matter 
in  question  in  that  bill.  When  an  individual  prosecutes  a  bill 
of  indictment  against  another,  and  the  defendant  procures 
another  bill  to  be  found  against  the  first  prosecutor,  the  bills  so 
found  by  the  grand  jury  are  called  cross  bills.  In  chancery 
practice  it  is  not  unusual  for  parties  to  file  cross  bills. 

D 

Direct  evidence. — Evidence  is  termed  direct  which 
applies  immediately  to  the  fact  to  be  proved,  without  any  in- 
tervening process,  as  distinguished  from  circumstantial,  which 


172         PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE  BOOK. 

applies  immediately  to  collateral  facts  supposed  to  have  a 
connection,  near  or  remote,  with  the  fact  in  controversy. 

Direct  examination. — The  examination  in  chief  of  a 
witness  is  called  the  direct  examination. 

Duces  tecum. — A  writ,  commonly  called  a  subpoena  du- 
ces  tecum,  commanding  the  person  to  whom  it  is  directed  to 
bring  with  him  some  writings,  papers,  or  other  things  therein 
specified  and  described,  before  the  court. 

E 

Evidence  in  Chief. — Evidence  is  said  to  be  in  chief 
when  it  is  given  in  support  of  the  case  opened  by  the  leading 
counsel.  The  term  is  used  to  distinguish  evidence  of  this  na- 
ture from  evidence  obtained  on  a  cross-extimination. 

Ex  COntractU. — This  term  is  applied  to  such  things  as 
arise  from  a  contract ;  as  an  action  which  arises  ex  contract".. 

Ex  necessitate. — Necessarily. 

Ex  offlcio. — By  virtue  of  his  office. 

Ex  parte. — Of  the  one  part .  An  affidavit  or  deposition 
is  said  to  be  taken  ex  parte  when  only  one  of  the  parties 
attends  at  the  taking  of  the  same. 

Ex  rel.  (relatione).— At  the  information  of;  by  the 
relation. 

F 

Pee  simple. — An  absolute  fee;  a  fee  without  conditions 
or  limits. 

Felo  de  SO. — A  felon  of  himself;  a  self  murderer;  one 
who  commits  suicide. 

Foreign  bills. — A  foreign  bill  of  exchange  is  one  drawn 
by  a  person  out  of,  on  another  in,  the  United  States,  or  vice 
versa ;  or  by  a  person  in  a  foreign  country,  on  another  person 
in  another  foreign  country;  or  by  a  person  in  one  state,  on 
another  in  another  of  the  United  States. 

G 

Grand  jury. — A  jury  of  not  less  than  twelve  nor  gener- 
ally more  than  twenty-three,  whose  duty  it  is  to  examine  into 
accusations  against  persons  charged  with  crime,  and  if  they 
see  just  cause,  then  to  find  bills  of  indictment  against  them, 
to  be  presented  to  the  court.  Called  also  grand  inquest. 


PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE   BOOK.         173 

H 

Habeas  corpus. — A  writ  having  for  its  object  to  bring 
a  party  before  a  court  or  judge;  especially,  one  to  inquire 
into  the  cause  of  a  person's  imprisonment  or  detention  by 
another,  with  the  view  to  protect  the  right  to  personal  liberty. 

Heir  at  law. — He  who,  after  his  ancestor's  death  intes- 
tate, has  a  right  to  all  lands,  tenements,  and  hereditaments, 
which  belonged  to  him,  or  of  which  he  was  seised.  The  same 
as  heir  general. 

I 

In  Chief. — (See  Evidence  in  chief.) 

In  curia. — In  the  court. 

In  esse. — In  being.  A  thing  in  existence.  It  is  used  in 
opposition  to  in  posse  (In  possibility;  not  in  actual  existence.) 

In  CXtenso. — In  full;  at  length. 

In  extremis. — When  a  person  is  sick  beyond  the  hope 
of  recovery,  and  near  death,  he  is  said  to  be  in  extremis. 

In  future. — At  a  future  period. 

In  loco. — In  the  place  of.  "  The  master  stands  toward 
his  apprentice  in  loco  pareniis  (in  the  place  of  a  parent). 

In  personam. — A  remedy  in  personam,  is  one  where 
the  proceedings  are  against  the  person,  in  contradistinction  to 
those  which  are  against  specific  things,  or  in  rem. 

In  re. — In  the  matter  of.  "In  re  estate  of  John  Smith, 
deceased" — i.e.,  "In  the  matter  of  the  estate  of  John  Smith, 
deceased." 

In  situ.— In  its  position. 

In  statu  quo. — In  the  same  situation ;  in  the  same  place. 
"  In  the  position  in  which  it  was — he  was — they  were." 

In  terrorem. — By  way  of  threat,  terror,  or  warning. 

In  toto. — Wholly;  altogether;  utterly.  "The  award  is 
void  in  toto." 

In  transitu. — During  the  transit,  or  removal  from  one 
place  to  another. 

International  law. — That  law  which  regulates  the  in- 
tercourse between,  or  the  relative  rights  of  nations. 

J 

Judge's  Notes.— Short  statements  made  by  a  judge  on 


174        PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

the  trial  of  a  cause,  of  what  transpires  in  the  course  of  such 
trial.  They  usually  contain  a  statement  of  the  testimony  of 
witnesses ;  of  documents  offered  or  admitted  in  evidence ;  of 
offers  of  evidence,  and  whether  it  has  been  received  or  re- 
jected, and  the  like  matters. 

K 

King's  Bench'. — The  name  of  the  Supreme  Court  of  law 
in  England.  It  is  so  called  because  formerly  the  king  used 
to  sit  there  in  person,  the  style  of  the  court  being  still  coram 
ipso  rege  (before  the  king  himself).  During  the  reign  of  a 
queen,  it  is  called  the  Queen's  Bench ;  and  during  the  pro- 
tectorate of  Cromwell,  it  was  called  the  Upper  Bench. 

L 

Law  of  Nations. — The  science  which  teaches  the  rights 
subsisting  between  nations  or  states,  and  the  obligations  cor- 
respondent to  those  rights. 

Lay  corporations. — Corporations  %vhich  affect  or  relate 
to  other  than  ecclesiastical  persons. 

Lex  fori. — The  law  of  the  court  or  forum. 

Lex  loci. — The  law  of  the  place. 

Lex  talionis. — The  law  of  retaliation,  as  "an  eye  for  an 
eye,  a  tooth  for  a  tooth." 

M 

Mala  fides. — Bad  faith.  It  is  opposed  to  bond  fides,  good 
faith. 

Medical  jurisprudence. — That  science  which  applies 
the  principles  and  practice  of  the  different  branches  of  medi- 
cine to  the  elucidation  of  doubtful  questions  in  courts  of 

justice. 

N 

Next  of  kin. — This  term  is  used  to  signify  the  relations 
of  a  party  who  has  died  intestate. 

P 

Pari  passu. — With  an  equal  pace.  By  the  same  grada- 
tion. In  the  same  degree  or  proportion. 

Post  mortem. — After  death.  "A  post  mortem  examina- 
tion." 

Prima  facie. — On  the  first  view.     "On  the  first  blush  of 


PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK.         175 

the  business."  Prima  facie  evidence  of  a  fact,  is  in  law  suffi- 
cient to  establish  the  fact,  unless  it  is  rebutted. 

Pro  rata. — According  to  the  rate,  proportion  or  allow- 
ance. 

Pro  tanto. — For  so  much. 

Q 

Quo  animo. — The  intent;  the  mind  with  which  a  thing 
has  been  done. 

Quo  warranto. — By  what  authority  or  warrant. 

B 

Res  gestse. — The  things  done.     The  subject  matter. 

Res  inter  alios  acta. — Acts  of  others,  or  transactions 
between  others. 

Res  judicata. — The  decision  of  a  legal  or  equitable 
issue,  by  a  court  of  competent  jurisdiction. 

Residuary  legatee. — He  to  whom  the  residuum  of  the 
estate  is  devised  or  bequeathed  by  will. 

Resulting  trust. — Resulting,  implied  or  constructive 
trusts,  are  those  which  arise  in  cases  where  it  would  be  con- 
trary to  the  principles  of  equity  that  he  in  whom  the  property 
becomes  vested  should  hold  it  otherwise  than  as  a  trustee. 

Resulting  use. — One  which  having  been  limited  by 
deed,  expires  or  cannot  vest;  it  then  returns  back  to  him  who 
raised  it,  after  such  expiration,  or  during  such  impossibility. 

S 

Ship's  husband. — An  agent  appointed  by  the  owner  of 
a  ship,  and  invested  with  authority  to  make  the  requisite  re- 
pairs, and  attend  to  the  management,  equipment,  and  other 
concerns  of  the  ship. 

Statute  of  Frauds. — The  name  commonly  given  to  the 
statute  29  Car.  ii.  (Charles  ii.)  c.  3,  entitled  "An  Act  for  the 
Prevention  of  Frauds  and  Perjuries." 

By  this  statute,  many  things  that,  under  the  common  law, 
might  be  done  by  parol,  were  required  to  be  put  in  writing 
and  signed  by  the  party  to  be  charged  or  his  attorney. 
Among  the  subjects  covered  by  it  are  the  following :  con- 
veyances, leases,  special  promises  to  answer  for  the  debt, 
default  or  miscarriage  of  another,  agreements  made  upon 


176         PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE   BOOK. 

consideration  of  marriage,  contracts  for  the  sale  of  lands, 
agreements  not  to  be  performed  within  the  space  of  one 
year  from  the  making  thereof,  etc. 

The  substance  of  this  statute,  in  most  respects,  has  been 
re-enacted  in  almost  all  the  States  of  the  Union. 

Struck  jury. — A  special  jury  selected  by  striking  from 
the  panel  of  jurors,  a  certain  number  by  each  party,  so  as  to 
leave  a  number  required  by  law  to  try  the  cause. 

T 

Terra  flrma. — Solid  earth ;  a  safe  footing. 
Treasure  trove. — Found  treasure. 

V 

Valuable  consideration. — An  equivalent  for  a  thing 
purchased. 

Vice  versa. — The  terms  being  exchanged;  reversely; 
the  reverse. 

Viva  VOCe; — By  the  living  voice ;  by  word  of  mouth ;  by 
oral  testimony. 


INDEX. 


177 


INDEX. 


***  The  references  are  to  the  numbers  of  the  sections  unless  otherwise 
specified, 

Do,  132  ;  Don't,  105—108 ;  Do  we, 

270  ;   Do  you,  270 
Dot-lines,  16,  17 


A,  66,  67,  69 — 73 

Abbreviations,  Key  to  Derivatives 
of,  27 1  — 273  ;  Reasons  for  Adopt- 
ing Simple  stem-signs  for,  225  ; 
Table  of,  page  105,  sections  271 — 
273 

Absence,  74 

After,  75 

All,  76,  77 

An,  69 — 72,  78 

And,  79,  80 

Another,  81,  82 

An't.  109 

Any,  85,86;  Anybody,  84;  Any 
one,  84 ;  Any  other,  82,  86 ; 
Anything,  88 

Are,  89 — 92 

As,  93 — 96 

At  sometime,  97 

At  the«-ame  time,  97 

Autumn,  238 

Balanced  Phrase-signs,  20,  21 

Bank  account,  99 

Bank  note,  99 

Been.  100 

Believe,  101 

Belong,  101 

Bill,  102,  103 

Brief-w,  58 

Brief  10  and  y.  Mode  of  Writing, 

60 — 65  ;  Position  of,  14,  15 
Briefly,  59 
Briefest  Outlines  not  Always  Best, 

6.7 

Can,  104  ;  Can't,  105 — 108 

Change,  no 

Charge,  no 

Circle,  Large,  50 — 52;  Small,  47, 

48.49 

Com — Con,  in — 115 
Could,  104  ;  Couldn't,  105 — 108 
Curls,  55 

Dash  Word-signs,  5 

Date,  118 

Day,  118 

Did,  132  ;  didn't,  105—108 ;  Did 

we,  270  ;  Did  you,  270. 
Difficult  Junctions,  22,  23 
Directions  to  the  Learner,  page  vii 
Distinguished  Phrases,  269,  270 
Divided  Phrase-signs,  8,  9 


Else,  123 
Ever,  124 
Extent,  125 

F  or  V  hook,  38,  43 
Far,  126 
Find,  127 
Found,  127 
From — to,  128 

Give,  130 

Had,  131,  132  ;  Hadn't,  105 — 108 
Halving  Principle,  45 — 47 
Has,  134—135 
Have,  124, 136  ;  Have  been — Have 

been  thr,  137  ;    Haven't,    105— 

108 

He,  140 — 142  ;  He'll,  143 
Heavy  Face  Letters,  18,  19 
Him,  144 
His,  145,  146 

I,  141,  142,  147—154 ;  I  have — I 
will,  152,  153  ;  I'll,  143;  I  think, 
241 

111,  156 

Illustrative  Examples,  19 

In.  158—160,  194  ;  In  re-,  161 

Indeed, 162 

Inform,  186 

Ing,  164.  165  ;  Ing  a-n,  166  ;  Ing 
the,  166 

Is,  167 — 169 

Keep,  187 
Know,  206 

L-hook,  33 

Late.  193 

Lately,  175 

Law  and  Other  Peculiar  Terms, 

27,  28 

Lengthening  Principle,  42 — 44, 233 
Less,  123 

List  of  Phrases,  pages  9  to  104 
Little,  175 

Loop,  Large,  54, 233  ;  Small,  53 
Loop-signs,  13 


178  INDEX. 


Me,  144 

Mr.  (Mister;,  iz 

N-curl,  55 

N-hook,  39.  40,  44,  46 

No,   85,  86  ;  No  doubt,  162  ;  No 

other,  82,  86 

Not,  182,  183  ;  Not  necessary,  184 
Notify,  186 

Occupy,  187 

Of,  188, 189  ;  Of  com  (or  con),  190  ; 

Of  our,  191 
Old,  193 
Old  Systems  and  Phraseography, 

On,  194 

Once,  195 

One.  196,  197  ;  One  or,  198 

Or,  199 

Other,  201 

Our,  204 

Own,  205,  206 

Part,  208 

Phrases,  Kinds  of,  2 — 4 

Position,  Rule  of,  10 — 13  ;  Words 

written  Out  of,  page  in 
Practice  on  the  Phrases,  Exercises 

for,  page   in  ;    Key   to  same, 

page  163 

Preface,  pages  iii — vi 
Proximity,  57 

R-hook,  34 
Remember,  209 

Say,  210,  211  ;  Says,  212 

See,  210,  211 

Send — Sent,  213 

Session,  214,  215 

Shall,  216 

She'll.  143 

Should,  «6;  Shouldn't,  105—108 

Signs  to  Phrases,  From,  32 — 59 

Society,  217 

Specialty  Phrases,  25 

Speed  Practice,  24 


Store,  31  (Examples) 
System,  217,  218 

Than,  219 

Thank  the,  220 

That,  221 — 225 

The,  69,  71,  226  ;  The  other,  228 

Their,  202,  203,  229,  233 

Them,  221,  223 

Ther-hook,  41 

There,  232  ;  Therefore,  234 

They  are,   235  ;  They  have,  264, 

265  ;  They'll,  143 
Thr,  237 
Tick-signs,  Position  of,  14,  15;  Use 

of,  56 

Tick  Word-signs,  5 
Time,  238,  239 
To  or  too,  240  ;  To  (or  too)  com, 

"5 
Two  signs  for  One  Phrase,  26 

Until,  241 
Us,  242,  243 

V-hook,  38 

Was,  244  ;  Was  not,  245,  246 ;  Was 

thr,  247 — 250 
Way-hook,  35,  36 
We,  251,  252  ;  We'll,  143 
Well,  253,  254 
Were,  90 — 92,  255  ;    Were  not — 

Were  there,  256 
When,  257 
Who  would,  250 
Why,  257 

Will,  259 

Woman,  260 

Word-forms  Changed  in  Phrases, 

29,  30 

Words  to  P  hrases,  From,  66 — 268 
Would,  261 

Yay-hook,  37 

You,  262,  263  ;  You  have,  264,  266 ; 

You'll,  143 
Your,  262,  263,  268 


CORRECTIONS. 


These  corrections  may  be  drawn  in,  in  their  respective  alphabetic  places, 
with  a  sharp  pointed  pencil,  and  this  slip  then  torn  out. 


Page  21,    but  such  as 

1  —TV- 

Page  23,    can  be  said  that 

Page  34,    from  house  to  house 

o) 

Page  35,    had  there  been    _Y_ 
Page  41,    I  ask  you      -^-y  '_ 


178 


INDEX. 


Me,  144 

Mr.  (Mister;,  12 

N-curl,  55 

N-hook,  39,  40,  44,  46 

No,   85,  86  ;  No  dovibt,  162  ;  No 

other,  82,  86 

Not,  182,  183  ;  Not  necessary,  184 
Notify,  186 

Occupy,  187 

Of,  188, 189  ;  Of  com  (or  con),  190  ; 

Of  our,  191 
Old,  193 


Score,  31  (Examples) 
System,  217,  218 

Than,  219 

Thank  the,  220 

That,  221 — 225 

The,  69,  71,  226  ;  The  other,  228 

Their,  202,  203,  229,  233 

Them,  221,  223 

Ther-hook,  41 

There,  232  ;  Therefore,  234 

They  are,   235  ;  They  have,  264, 

265  ;  They'll,  143 
Thr,  237 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


!JAN2519« 

REC'D  URL-LE 
FEB161967 

FEB  151967 


Form  L9-25m-9,'47(A5618)444 


UNIVERSITY  ot  CALIFORNIA 

AT 

LOS  ANGELES 
LIBRARY 


A    000 


